1\input texinfo   @c -*- texinfo -*-
2@setfilename gdbint.info
3@include gdb-cfg.texi
4@settitle @value{GDBN} Internals
5@setchapternewpage off
6@dircategory Software development
7@direntry
8* Gdb-Internals: (gdbint).	The GNU debugger's internals.
9@end direntry
10
11@copying
12Copyright @copyright{} 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999,
132000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
14Free Software Foundation, Inc.
15Contributed by Cygnus Solutions.  Written by John Gilmore.
16Second Edition by Stan Shebs.
17
18Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
19under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
20any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
21Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
22Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
23Free Documentation License''.
24@end copying
25
26@ifnottex
27This file documents the internals of the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
28
29@insertcopying
30@end ifnottex
31
32
33@syncodeindex fn cp
34@syncodeindex vr cp
35
36@titlepage
37@title @value{GDBN} Internals
38@subtitle{A guide to the internals of the GNU debugger}
39@author John Gilmore
40@author Cygnus Solutions
41@author Second Edition:
42@author Stan Shebs
43@author Cygnus Solutions
44@page
45@tex
46\def\$#1${{#1}}  % Kluge: collect RCS revision info without $...$
47\xdef\manvers{\$Revision$}  % For use in headers, footers too
48{\parskip=0pt
49\hfill Cygnus Solutions\par
50\hfill \manvers\par
51\hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
52}
53@end tex
54
55@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
56@insertcopying
57@end titlepage
58
59@contents
60
61@node Top
62@c Perhaps this should be the title of the document (but only for info,
63@c not for TeX).  Existing GNU manuals seem inconsistent on this point.
64@top Scope of this Document
65
66This document documents the internals of the GNU debugger, @value{GDBN}.  It
67includes description of @value{GDBN}'s key algorithms and operations, as well
68as the mechanisms that adapt @value{GDBN} to specific hosts and targets.
69
70@menu
71* Summary::
72* Overall Structure::
73* Algorithms::
74* User Interface::
75* libgdb::
76* Values::
77* Stack Frames::
78* Symbol Handling::
79* Language Support::
80* Host Definition::
81* Target Architecture Definition::
82* Target Descriptions::
83* Target Vector Definition::
84* Native Debugging::
85* Support Libraries::
86* Coding Standards::
87* Misc Guidelines::
88* Porting GDB::
89* Versions and Branches::
90* Start of New Year Procedure::
91* Releasing GDB::
92* Testsuite::
93* Hints::
94
95* GDB Observers::  @value{GDBN} Currently available observers
96* GNU Free Documentation License::  The license for this documentation
97* Index::
98@end menu
99
100@node Summary
101@chapter Summary
102
103@menu
104* Requirements::
105* Contributors::
106@end menu
107
108@node Requirements
109@section Requirements
110@cindex requirements for @value{GDBN}
111
112Before diving into the internals, you should understand the formal
113requirements and other expectations for @value{GDBN}.  Although some
114of these may seem obvious, there have been proposals for @value{GDBN}
115that have run counter to these requirements.
116
117First of all, @value{GDBN} is a debugger.  It's not designed to be a
118front panel for embedded systems.  It's not a text editor.  It's not a
119shell.  It's not a programming environment.
120
121@value{GDBN} is an interactive tool.  Although a batch mode is
122available, @value{GDBN}'s primary role is to interact with a human
123programmer.
124
125@value{GDBN} should be responsive to the user.  A programmer hot on
126the trail of a nasty bug, and operating under a looming deadline, is
127going to be very impatient of everything, including the response time
128to debugger commands.
129
130@value{GDBN} should be relatively permissive, such as for expressions.
131While the compiler should be picky (or have the option to be made
132picky), since source code lives for a long time usually, the
133programmer doing debugging shouldn't be spending time figuring out to
134mollify the debugger.
135
136@value{GDBN} will be called upon to deal with really large programs.
137Executable sizes of 50 to 100 megabytes occur regularly, and we've
138heard reports of programs approaching 1 gigabyte in size.
139
140@value{GDBN} should be able to run everywhere.  No other debugger is
141available for even half as many configurations as @value{GDBN}
142supports.
143
144@node Contributors
145@section Contributors
146
147The first edition of this document was written by John Gilmore of
148Cygnus Solutions. The current second edition was written by Stan Shebs
149of Cygnus Solutions, who continues to update the manual.
150
151Over the years, many others have made additions and changes to this
152document. This section attempts to record the significant contributors
153to that effort. One of the virtues of free software is that everyone
154is free to contribute to it; with regret, we cannot actually
155acknowledge everyone here.
156
157@quotation
158@emph{Plea:} This section has only been added relatively recently (four
159years after publication of the second edition). Additions to this
160section are particularly welcome.  If you or your friends (or enemies,
161to be evenhanded) have been unfairly omitted from this list, we would
162like to add your names!
163@end quotation
164
165A document such as this relies on being kept up to date by numerous
166small updates by contributing engineers as they make changes to the
167code base. The file @file{ChangeLog} in the @value{GDBN} distribution
168approximates a blow-by-blow account. The most prolific contributors to
169this important, but low profile task are Andrew Cagney (responsible
170for over half the entries), Daniel Jacobowitz, Mark Kettenis, Jim
171Blandy and Eli Zaretskii.
172
173Eli Zaretskii and Daniel Jacobowitz wrote the sections documenting
174watchpoints.
175
176Jeremy Bennett updated the sections on initializing a new architecture
177and register representation, and added the section on Frame Interpretation.
178
179
180@node Overall Structure
181
182@chapter Overall Structure
183
184@value{GDBN} consists of three major subsystems: user interface,
185symbol handling (the @dfn{symbol side}), and target system handling (the
186@dfn{target side}).
187
188The user interface consists of several actual interfaces, plus
189supporting code.
190
191The symbol side consists of object file readers, debugging info
192interpreters, symbol table management, source language expression
193parsing, type and value printing.
194
195The target side consists of execution control, stack frame analysis, and
196physical target manipulation.
197
198The target side/symbol side division is not formal, and there are a
199number of exceptions.  For instance, core file support involves symbolic
200elements (the basic core file reader is in BFD) and target elements (it
201supplies the contents of memory and the values of registers).  Instead,
202this division is useful for understanding how the minor subsystems
203should fit together.
204
205@section The Symbol Side
206
207The symbolic side of @value{GDBN} can be thought of as ``everything
208you can do in @value{GDBN} without having a live program running''.
209For instance, you can look at the types of variables, and evaluate
210many kinds of expressions.
211
212@section The Target Side
213
214The target side of @value{GDBN} is the ``bits and bytes manipulator''.
215Although it may make reference to symbolic info here and there, most
216of the target side will run with only a stripped executable
217available---or even no executable at all, in remote debugging cases.
218
219Operations such as disassembly, stack frame crawls, and register
220display, are able to work with no symbolic info at all.  In some cases,
221such as disassembly, @value{GDBN} will use symbolic info to present addresses
222relative to symbols rather than as raw numbers, but it will work either
223way.
224
225@section Configurations
226
227@cindex host
228@cindex target
229@dfn{Host} refers to attributes of the system where @value{GDBN} runs.
230@dfn{Target} refers to the system where the program being debugged
231executes.  In most cases they are the same machine, in which case a
232third type of @dfn{Native} attributes come into play.
233
234Defines and include files needed to build on the host are host
235support.  Examples are tty support, system defined types, host byte
236order, host float format.  These are all calculated by @code{autoconf}
237when the debugger is built.
238
239Defines and information needed to handle the target format are target
240dependent.  Examples are the stack frame format, instruction set,
241breakpoint instruction, registers, and how to set up and tear down the stack
242to call a function.
243
244Information that is only needed when the host and target are the same,
245is native dependent.  One example is Unix child process support; if the
246host and target are not the same, calling @code{fork} to start the target
247process is a bad idea.  The various macros needed for finding the
248registers in the @code{upage}, running @code{ptrace}, and such are all
249in the native-dependent files.
250
251Another example of native-dependent code is support for features that
252are really part of the target environment, but which require
253@code{#include} files that are only available on the host system.  Core
254file handling and @code{setjmp} handling are two common cases.
255
256When you want to make @value{GDBN} work as the traditional native debugger
257on a system, you will need to supply both target and native information.
258
259@section Source Tree Structure
260@cindex @value{GDBN} source tree structure
261
262The @value{GDBN} source directory has a mostly flat structure---there
263are only a few subdirectories.  A file's name usually gives a hint as
264to what it does; for example, @file{stabsread.c} reads stabs,
265@file{dwarf2read.c} reads @sc{DWARF 2}, etc.
266
267Files that are related to some common task have names that share
268common substrings.  For example, @file{*-thread.c} files deal with
269debugging threads on various platforms; @file{*read.c} files deal with
270reading various kinds of symbol and object files; @file{inf*.c} files
271deal with direct control of the @dfn{inferior program} (@value{GDBN}
272parlance for the program being debugged).
273
274There are several dozens of files in the @file{*-tdep.c} family.
275@samp{tdep} stands for @dfn{target-dependent code}---each of these
276files implements debug support for a specific target architecture
277(sparc, mips, etc).  Usually, only one of these will be used in a
278specific @value{GDBN} configuration (sometimes two, closely related).
279
280Similarly, there are many @file{*-nat.c} files, each one for native
281debugging on a specific system (e.g., @file{sparc-linux-nat.c} is for
282native debugging of Sparc machines running the Linux kernel).
283
284The few subdirectories of the source tree are:
285
286@table @file
287@item cli
288Code that implements @dfn{CLI}, the @value{GDBN} Command-Line
289Interpreter.  @xref{User Interface, Command Interpreter}.
290
291@item gdbserver
292Code for the @value{GDBN} remote server.
293
294@item gdbtk
295Code for Insight, the @value{GDBN} TK-based GUI front-end.
296
297@item mi
298The @dfn{GDB/MI}, the @value{GDBN} Machine Interface interpreter.
299
300@item signals
301Target signal translation code.
302
303@item tui
304Code for @dfn{TUI}, the @value{GDBN} Text-mode full-screen User
305Interface.  @xref{User Interface, TUI}.
306@end table
307
308@node Algorithms
309
310@chapter Algorithms
311@cindex algorithms
312
313@value{GDBN} uses a number of debugging-specific algorithms.  They are
314often not very complicated, but get lost in the thicket of special
315cases and real-world issues.  This chapter describes the basic
316algorithms and mentions some of the specific target definitions that
317they use.
318
319@section Prologue Analysis
320
321@cindex prologue analysis
322@cindex call frame information
323@cindex CFI (call frame information)
324To produce a backtrace and allow the user to manipulate older frames'
325variables and arguments, @value{GDBN} needs to find the base addresses
326of older frames, and discover where those frames' registers have been
327saved.  Since a frame's ``callee-saves'' registers get saved by
328younger frames if and when they're reused, a frame's registers may be
329scattered unpredictably across younger frames.  This means that
330changing the value of a register-allocated variable in an older frame
331may actually entail writing to a save slot in some younger frame.
332
333Modern versions of GCC emit Dwarf call frame information (``CFI''),
334which describes how to find frame base addresses and saved registers.
335But CFI is not always available, so as a fallback @value{GDBN} uses a
336technique called @dfn{prologue analysis} to find frame sizes and saved
337registers.  A prologue analyzer disassembles the function's machine
338code starting from its entry point, and looks for instructions that
339allocate frame space, save the stack pointer in a frame pointer
340register, save registers, and so on.  Obviously, this can't be done
341accurately in general, but it's tractable to do well enough to be very
342helpful.  Prologue analysis predates the GNU toolchain's support for
343CFI; at one time, prologue analysis was the only mechanism
344@value{GDBN} used for stack unwinding at all, when the function
345calling conventions didn't specify a fixed frame layout.
346
347In the olden days, function prologues were generated by hand-written,
348target-specific code in GCC, and treated as opaque and untouchable by
349optimizers.  Looking at this code, it was usually straightforward to
350write a prologue analyzer for @value{GDBN} that would accurately
351understand all the prologues GCC would generate.  However, over time
352GCC became more aggressive about instruction scheduling, and began to
353understand more about the semantics of the prologue instructions
354themselves; in response, @value{GDBN}'s analyzers became more complex
355and fragile.  Keeping the prologue analyzers working as GCC (and the
356instruction sets themselves) evolved became a substantial task.
357
358@cindex @file{prologue-value.c}
359@cindex abstract interpretation of function prologues
360@cindex pseudo-evaluation of function prologues
361To try to address this problem, the code in @file{prologue-value.h}
362and @file{prologue-value.c} provides a general framework for writing
363prologue analyzers that are simpler and more robust than ad-hoc
364analyzers.  When we analyze a prologue using the prologue-value
365framework, we're really doing ``abstract interpretation'' or
366``pseudo-evaluation'': running the function's code in simulation, but
367using conservative approximations of the values registers and memory
368would hold when the code actually runs.  For example, if our function
369starts with the instruction:
370
371@example
372addi r1, 42     # add 42 to r1
373@end example
374@noindent
375we don't know exactly what value will be in @code{r1} after executing
376this instruction, but we do know it'll be 42 greater than its original
377value.
378
379If we then see an instruction like:
380
381@example
382addi r1, 22     # add 22 to r1
383@end example
384@noindent
385we still don't know what @code{r1's} value is, but again, we can say
386it is now 64 greater than its original value.
387
388If the next instruction were:
389
390@example
391mov r2, r1      # set r2 to r1's value
392@end example
393@noindent
394then we can say that @code{r2's} value is now the original value of
395@code{r1} plus 64.
396
397It's common for prologues to save registers on the stack, so we'll
398need to track the values of stack frame slots, as well as the
399registers.  So after an instruction like this:
400
401@example
402mov (fp+4), r2
403@end example
404@noindent
405then we'd know that the stack slot four bytes above the frame pointer
406holds the original value of @code{r1} plus 64.
407
408And so on.
409
410Of course, this can only go so far before it gets unreasonable.  If we
411wanted to be able to say anything about the value of @code{r1} after
412the instruction:
413
414@example
415xor r1, r3      # exclusive-or r1 and r3, place result in r1
416@end example
417@noindent
418then things would get pretty complex.  But remember, we're just doing
419a conservative approximation; if exclusive-or instructions aren't
420relevant to prologues, we can just say @code{r1}'s value is now
421``unknown''.  We can ignore things that are too complex, if that loss of
422information is acceptable for our application.
423
424So when we say ``conservative approximation'' here, what we mean is an
425approximation that is either accurate, or marked ``unknown'', but
426never inaccurate.
427
428Using this framework, a prologue analyzer is simply an interpreter for
429machine code, but one that uses conservative approximations for the
430contents of registers and memory instead of actual values.  Starting
431from the function's entry point, you simulate instructions up to the
432current PC, or an instruction that you don't know how to simulate.
433Now you can examine the state of the registers and stack slots you've
434kept track of.
435
436@itemize @bullet
437
438@item
439To see how large your stack frame is, just check the value of the
440stack pointer register; if it's the original value of the SP
441minus a constant, then that constant is the stack frame's size.
442If the SP's value has been marked as ``unknown'', then that means
443the prologue has done something too complex for us to track, and
444we don't know the frame size.
445
446@item
447To see where we've saved the previous frame's registers, we just
448search the values we've tracked --- stack slots, usually, but
449registers, too, if you want --- for something equal to the register's
450original value.  If the calling conventions suggest a standard place
451to save a given register, then we can check there first, but really,
452anything that will get us back the original value will probably work.
453@end itemize
454
455This does take some work.  But prologue analyzers aren't
456quick-and-simple pattern patching to recognize a few fixed prologue
457forms any more; they're big, hairy functions.  Along with inferior
458function calls, prologue analysis accounts for a substantial portion
459of the time needed to stabilize a @value{GDBN} port.  So it's
460worthwhile to look for an approach that will be easier to understand
461and maintain.  In the approach described above:
462
463@itemize @bullet
464
465@item
466It's easier to see that the analyzer is correct: you just see
467whether the analyzer properly (albeit conservatively) simulates
468the effect of each instruction.
469
470@item
471It's easier to extend the analyzer: you can add support for new
472instructions, and know that you haven't broken anything that
473wasn't already broken before.
474
475@item
476It's orthogonal: to gather new information, you don't need to
477complicate the code for each instruction.  As long as your domain
478of conservative values is already detailed enough to tell you
479what you need, then all the existing instruction simulations are
480already gathering the right data for you.
481
482@end itemize
483
484The file @file{prologue-value.h} contains detailed comments explaining
485the framework and how to use it.
486
487
488@section Breakpoint Handling
489
490@cindex breakpoints
491In general, a breakpoint is a user-designated location in the program
492where the user wants to regain control if program execution ever reaches
493that location.
494
495There are two main ways to implement breakpoints; either as ``hardware''
496breakpoints or as ``software'' breakpoints.
497
498@cindex hardware breakpoints
499@cindex program counter
500Hardware breakpoints are sometimes available as a builtin debugging
501features with some chips.  Typically these work by having dedicated
502register into which the breakpoint address may be stored.  If the PC
503(shorthand for @dfn{program counter})
504ever matches a value in a breakpoint registers, the CPU raises an
505exception and reports it to @value{GDBN}.
506
507Another possibility is when an emulator is in use; many emulators
508include circuitry that watches the address lines coming out from the
509processor, and force it to stop if the address matches a breakpoint's
510address.
511
512A third possibility is that the target already has the ability to do
513breakpoints somehow; for instance, a ROM monitor may do its own
514software breakpoints.  So although these are not literally ``hardware
515breakpoints'', from @value{GDBN}'s point of view they work the same;
516@value{GDBN} need not do anything more than set the breakpoint and wait
517for something to happen.
518
519Since they depend on hardware resources, hardware breakpoints may be
520limited in number; when the user asks for more, @value{GDBN} will
521start trying to set software breakpoints.  (On some architectures,
522notably the 32-bit x86 platforms, @value{GDBN} cannot always know
523whether there's enough hardware resources to insert all the hardware
524breakpoints and watchpoints.  On those platforms, @value{GDBN} prints
525an error message only when the program being debugged is continued.)
526
527@cindex software breakpoints
528Software breakpoints require @value{GDBN} to do somewhat more work.
529The basic theory is that @value{GDBN} will replace a program
530instruction with a trap, illegal divide, or some other instruction
531that will cause an exception, and then when it's encountered,
532@value{GDBN} will take the exception and stop the program.  When the
533user says to continue, @value{GDBN} will restore the original
534instruction, single-step, re-insert the trap, and continue on.
535
536Since it literally overwrites the program being tested, the program area
537must be writable, so this technique won't work on programs in ROM.  It
538can also distort the behavior of programs that examine themselves,
539although such a situation would be highly unusual.
540
541Also, the software breakpoint instruction should be the smallest size of
542instruction, so it doesn't overwrite an instruction that might be a jump
543target, and cause disaster when the program jumps into the middle of the
544breakpoint instruction.  (Strictly speaking, the breakpoint must be no
545larger than the smallest interval between instructions that may be jump
546targets; perhaps there is an architecture where only even-numbered
547instructions may jumped to.)  Note that it's possible for an instruction
548set not to have any instructions usable for a software breakpoint,
549although in practice only the ARC has failed to define such an
550instruction.
551
552Basic breakpoint object handling is in @file{breakpoint.c}.  However,
553much of the interesting breakpoint action is in @file{infrun.c}.
554
555@table @code
556@cindex insert or remove software breakpoint
557@findex target_remove_breakpoint
558@findex target_insert_breakpoint
559@item target_remove_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
560@itemx target_insert_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
561Insert or remove a software breakpoint at address
562@code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}.  Returns zero for success,
563non-zero for failure.  On input, @var{bp_tgt} contains the address of the
564breakpoint, and is otherwise initialized to zero.  The fields of the
565@code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by @var{bp_tgt} are updated
566to contain other information about the breakpoint on output.  The field
567@code{placed_address} may be updated if the breakpoint was placed at a
568related address; the field @code{shadow_contents} contains the real
569contents of the bytes where the breakpoint has been inserted,
570if reading memory would return the breakpoint instead of the
571underlying memory; the field @code{shadow_len} is the length of
572memory cached in @code{shadow_contents}, if any; and the field
573@code{placed_size} is optionally set and used by the target, if
574it could differ from @code{shadow_len}.
575
576For example, the remote target @samp{Z0} packet does not require
577shadowing memory, so @code{shadow_len} is left at zero.  However,
578the length reported by @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} is cached in
579@code{placed_size}, so that a matching @samp{z0} packet can be
580used to remove the breakpoint.
581
582@cindex insert or remove hardware breakpoint
583@findex target_remove_hw_breakpoint
584@findex target_insert_hw_breakpoint
585@item target_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
586@itemx target_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
587Insert or remove a hardware-assisted breakpoint at address
588@code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}.  Returns zero for success,
589non-zero for failure.  See @code{target_insert_breakpoint} for
590a description of the @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by
591@var{bp_tgt}; the @code{shadow_contents} and
592@code{shadow_len} members are not used for hardware breakpoints,
593but @code{placed_size} may be.
594@end table
595
596@section Single Stepping
597
598@section Signal Handling
599
600@section Thread Handling
601
602@section Inferior Function Calls
603
604@section Longjmp Support
605
606@cindex @code{longjmp} debugging
607@value{GDBN} has support for figuring out that the target is doing a
608@code{longjmp} and for stopping at the target of the jump, if we are
609stepping.  This is done with a few specialized internal breakpoints,
610which are visible in the output of the @samp{maint info breakpoint}
611command.
612
613@findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
614To make this work, you need to define a function called
615@code{gdbarch_get_longjmp_target}, which will examine the
616@code{jmp_buf} structure and extract the @code{longjmp} target address.
617Since @code{jmp_buf} is target specific and typically defined in a
618target header not available to @value{GDBN}, you will need to
619determine the offset of the PC manually and return that; many targets
620define a @code{jb_pc_offset} field in the tdep structure to save the
621value once calculated.
622
623@section Watchpoints
624@cindex watchpoints
625
626Watchpoints are a special kind of breakpoints (@pxref{Algorithms,
627breakpoints}) which break when data is accessed rather than when some
628instruction is executed.  When you have data which changes without
629your knowing what code does that, watchpoints are the silver bullet to
630hunt down and kill such bugs.
631
632@cindex hardware watchpoints
633@cindex software watchpoints
634Watchpoints can be either hardware-assisted or not; the latter type is
635known as ``software watchpoints.''  @value{GDBN} always uses
636hardware-assisted watchpoints if they are available, and falls back on
637software watchpoints otherwise.  Typical situations where @value{GDBN}
638will use software watchpoints are:
639
640@itemize @bullet
641@item
642The watched memory region is too large for the underlying hardware
643watchpoint support.  For example, each x86 debug register can watch up
644to 4 bytes of memory, so trying to watch data structures whose size is
645more than 16 bytes will cause @value{GDBN} to use software
646watchpoints.
647
648@item
649The value of the expression to be watched depends on data held in
650registers (as opposed to memory).
651
652@item
653Too many different watchpoints requested.  (On some architectures,
654this situation is impossible to detect until the debugged program is
655resumed.)  Note that x86 debug registers are used both for hardware
656breakpoints and for watchpoints, so setting too many hardware
657breakpoints might cause watchpoint insertion to fail.
658
659@item
660No hardware-assisted watchpoints provided by the target
661implementation.
662@end itemize
663
664Software watchpoints are very slow, since @value{GDBN} needs to
665single-step the program being debugged and test the value of the
666watched expression(s) after each instruction.  The rest of this
667section is mostly irrelevant for software watchpoints.
668
669When the inferior stops, @value{GDBN} tries to establish, among other
670possible reasons, whether it stopped due to a watchpoint being hit.
671It first uses @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to see if any watchpoint
672was hit.  If not, all watchpoint checking is skipped.
673
674Then @value{GDBN} calls @code{target_stopped_data_address} exactly
675once.  This method returns the address of the watchpoint which
676triggered, if the target can determine it.  If the triggered address
677is available, @value{GDBN} compares the address returned by this
678method with each watched memory address in each active watchpoint.
679For data-read and data-access watchpoints, @value{GDBN} announces
680every watchpoint that watches the triggered address as being hit.
681For this reason, data-read and data-access watchpoints
682@emph{require} that the triggered address be available; if not, read
683and access watchpoints will never be considered hit.  For data-write
684watchpoints, if the triggered address is available, @value{GDBN}
685considers only those watchpoints which match that address;
686otherwise, @value{GDBN} considers all data-write watchpoints.  For
687each data-write watchpoint that @value{GDBN} considers, it evaluates
688the expression whose value is being watched, and tests whether the
689watched value has changed.  Watchpoints whose watched values have
690changed are announced as hit.
691
692@c FIXME move these to the main lists of target/native defns
693
694@value{GDBN} uses several macros and primitives to support hardware
695watchpoints:
696
697@table @code
698@findex TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT
699@item TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT (@var{type}, @var{count}, @var{other})
700Return the number of hardware watchpoints of type @var{type} that are
701possible to be set.  The value is positive if @var{count} watchpoints
702of this type can be set, zero if setting watchpoints of this type is
703not supported, and negative if @var{count} is more than the maximum
704number of watchpoints of type @var{type} that can be set.  @var{other}
705is non-zero if other types of watchpoints are currently enabled (there
706are architectures which cannot set watchpoints of different types at
707the same time).
708
709@findex TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT
710@item TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT (@var{addr}, @var{len})
711Return non-zero if hardware watchpoints can be used to watch a region
712whose address is @var{addr} and whose length in bytes is @var{len}.
713
714@cindex insert or remove hardware watchpoint
715@findex target_insert_watchpoint
716@findex target_remove_watchpoint
717@item target_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
718@itemx target_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
719Insert or remove a hardware watchpoint starting at @var{addr}, for
720@var{len} bytes.  @var{type} is the watchpoint type, one of the
721possible values of the enumerated data type @code{target_hw_bp_type},
722defined by @file{breakpoint.h} as follows:
723
724@smallexample
725 enum target_hw_bp_type
726   @{
727     hw_write   = 0, /* Common (write) HW watchpoint */
728     hw_read    = 1, /* Read    HW watchpoint */
729     hw_access  = 2, /* Access (read or write) HW watchpoint */
730     hw_execute = 3  /* Execute HW breakpoint */
731   @};
732@end smallexample
733
734@noindent
735These two macros should return 0 for success, non-zero for failure.
736
737@findex target_stopped_data_address
738@item target_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
739If the inferior has some watchpoint that triggered, place the address
740associated with the watchpoint at the location pointed to by
741@var{addr_p} and return non-zero.  Otherwise, return zero.  This
742is required for data-read and data-access watchpoints.  It is
743not required for data-write watchpoints, but @value{GDBN} uses
744it to improve handling of those also.
745
746@value{GDBN} will only call this method once per watchpoint stop,
747immediately after calling @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}.  If the
748target's watchpoint indication is sticky, i.e., stays set after
749resuming, this method should clear it.  For instance, the x86 debug
750control register has sticky triggered flags.
751
752@findex target_watchpoint_addr_within_range
753@item target_watchpoint_addr_within_range (@var{target}, @var{addr}, @var{start}, @var{length})
754Check whether @var{addr} (as returned by @code{target_stopped_data_address})
755lies within the hardware-defined watchpoint region described by
756@var{start} and @var{length}.  This only needs to be provided if the
757granularity of a watchpoint is greater than one byte, i.e., if the
758watchpoint can also trigger on nearby addresses outside of the watched
759region.
760
761@findex HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
762@item HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
763If defined to a non-zero value, it is not necessary to disable a
764watchpoint to step over it.  Like @code{gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint},
765this is usually set when watchpoints trigger at the instruction
766which will perform an interesting read or write.  It should be
767set if there is a temporary disable bit which allows the processor
768to step over the interesting instruction without raising the
769watchpoint exception again.
770
771@findex gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint
772@item int gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint (@var{gdbarch})
773If it returns a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} should disable a
774watchpoint to step the inferior over it.  This is usually set when
775watchpoints trigger at the instruction which will perform an
776interesting read or write.
777
778@findex HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
779@item HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
780If defined to a non-zero value, it is possible to continue the
781inferior after a watchpoint has been hit.  This is usually set
782when watchpoints trigger at the instruction following an interesting
783read or write.
784
785@findex STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT
786@item STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT (@var{wait_status})
787Return non-zero if stopped by a watchpoint.  @var{wait_status} is of
788the type @code{struct target_waitstatus}, defined by @file{target.h}.
789Normally, this macro is defined to invoke the function pointed to by
790the @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} member of the structure (of the
791type @code{target_ops}, defined on @file{target.h}) that describes the
792target-specific operations; @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} ignores
793the @var{wait_status} argument.
794
795@value{GDBN} does not require the non-zero value returned by
796@code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to be 100% correct, so if a target cannot
797determine for sure whether the inferior stopped due to a watchpoint,
798it could return non-zero ``just in case''.
799@end table
800
801@subsection Watchpoints and Threads
802@cindex watchpoints, with threads
803
804@value{GDBN} only supports process-wide watchpoints, which trigger
805in all threads.  @value{GDBN} uses the thread ID to make watchpoints
806act as if they were thread-specific, but it cannot set hardware
807watchpoints that only trigger in a specific thread.  Therefore, even
808if the target supports threads, per-thread debug registers, and
809watchpoints which only affect a single thread, it should set the
810per-thread debug registers for all threads to the same value.  On
811@sc{gnu}/Linux native targets, this is accomplished by using
812@code{ALL_LWPS} in @code{target_insert_watchpoint} and
813@code{target_remove_watchpoint} and by using
814@code{linux_set_new_thread} to register a handler for newly created
815threads.
816
817@value{GDBN}'s @sc{gnu}/Linux support only reports a single event
818at a time, although multiple events can trigger simultaneously for
819multi-threaded programs.  When multiple events occur, @file{linux-nat.c}
820queues subsequent events and returns them the next time the program
821is resumed.  This means that @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} and
822@code{target_stopped_data_address} only need to consult the current
823thread's state---the thread indicated by @code{inferior_ptid}.  If
824two threads have hit watchpoints simultaneously, those routines
825will be called a second time for the second thread.
826
827@subsection x86 Watchpoints
828@cindex x86 debug registers
829@cindex watchpoints, on x86
830
831The 32-bit Intel x86 (a.k.a.@: ia32) processors feature special debug
832registers designed to facilitate debugging.  @value{GDBN} provides a
833generic library of functions that x86-based ports can use to implement
834support for watchpoints and hardware-assisted breakpoints.  This
835subsection documents the x86 watchpoint facilities in @value{GDBN}.
836
837(At present, the library functions read and write debug registers directly, and are
838thus only available for native configurations.)
839
840To use the generic x86 watchpoint support, a port should do the
841following:
842
843@itemize @bullet
844@findex I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
845@item
846Define the macro @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS} somewhere in the
847target-dependent headers.
848
849@item
850Include the @file{config/i386/nm-i386.h} header file @emph{after}
851defining @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
852
853@item
854Add @file{i386-nat.o} to the value of the Make variable
855@code{NATDEPFILES} (@pxref{Native Debugging, NATDEPFILES}).
856
857@item
858Provide implementations for the @code{I386_DR_LOW_*} macros described
859below.  Typically, each macro should call a target-specific function
860which does the real work.
861@end itemize
862
863The x86 watchpoint support works by maintaining mirror images of the
864debug registers.  Values are copied between the mirror images and the
865real debug registers via a set of macros which each target needs to
866provide:
867
868@table @code
869@findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL
870@item I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL (@var{val})
871Set the Debug Control (DR7) register to the value @var{val}.
872
873@findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR
874@item I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR (@var{idx}, @var{addr})
875Put the address @var{addr} into the debug register number @var{idx}.
876
877@findex I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR
878@item I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR (@var{idx})
879Reset (i.e.@: zero out) the address stored in the debug register
880number @var{idx}.
881
882@findex I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
883@item I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
884Return the value of the Debug Status (DR6) register.  This value is
885used immediately after it is returned by
886@code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}, so as to support per-thread status
887register values.
888@end table
889
890For each one of the 4 debug registers (whose indices are from 0 to 3)
891that store addresses, a reference count is maintained by @value{GDBN},
892to allow sharing of debug registers by several watchpoints.  This
893allows users to define several watchpoints that watch the same
894expression, but with different conditions and/or commands, without
895wasting debug registers which are in short supply.  @value{GDBN}
896maintains the reference counts internally, targets don't have to do
897anything to use this feature.
898
899The x86 debug registers can each watch a region that is 1, 2, or 4
900bytes long.  The ia32 architecture requires that each watched region
901be appropriately aligned: 2-byte region on 2-byte boundary, 4-byte
902region on 4-byte boundary.  However, the x86 watchpoint support in
903@value{GDBN} can watch unaligned regions and regions larger than 4
904bytes (up to 16 bytes) by allocating several debug registers to watch
905a single region.  This allocation of several registers per a watched
906region is also done automatically without target code intervention.
907
908The generic x86 watchpoint support provides the following API for the
909@value{GDBN}'s application code:
910
911@table @code
912@findex i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint
913@item i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len})
914The macro @code{TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT} is set to call
915this function.  It counts the number of debug registers required to
916watch a given region, and returns a non-zero value if that number is
917less than 4, the number of debug registers available to x86
918processors.
919
920@findex i386_stopped_data_address
921@item i386_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
922The target function
923@code{target_stopped_data_address} is set to call this function.
924This
925function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
926Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
927macro, and returns the address associated with the first bit that is
928set in DR6.
929
930@findex i386_stopped_by_watchpoint
931@item i386_stopped_by_watchpoint (void)
932The macro @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}
933is set to call this function.  The
934argument passed to @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} is ignored.  This
935function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
936Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
937macro, and returns true if any bit is set.  Otherwise, false is
938returned.
939
940@findex i386_insert_watchpoint
941@findex i386_remove_watchpoint
942@item i386_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
943@itemx i386_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
944Insert or remove a watchpoint.  The macros
945@code{target_insert_watchpoint} and @code{target_remove_watchpoint}
946are set to call these functions.  @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} first
947looks for a debug register which is already set to watch the same
948region for the same access types; if found, it just increments the
949reference count of that debug register, thus implementing debug
950register sharing between watchpoints.  If no such register is found,
951the function looks for a vacant debug register, sets its mirrored
952value to @var{addr}, sets the mirrored value of DR7 Debug Control
953register as appropriate for the @var{len} and @var{type} parameters,
954and then passes the new values of the debug register and DR7 to the
955inferior by calling @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR} and
956@code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}.  If more than one debug register is
957required to cover the given region, the above process is repeated for
958each debug register.
959
960@code{i386_remove_watchpoint} does the opposite: it resets the address
961in the mirrored value of the debug register and its read/write and
962length bits in the mirrored value of DR7, then passes these new
963values to the inferior via @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and
964@code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}.  If a register is shared by several
965watchpoints, each time a @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} is called, it
966decrements the reference count, and only calls
967@code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL} when
968the count goes to zero.
969
970@findex i386_insert_hw_breakpoint
971@findex i386_remove_hw_breakpoint
972@item i386_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
973@itemx i386_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
974These functions insert and remove hardware-assisted breakpoints.  The
975macros @code{target_insert_hw_breakpoint} and
976@code{target_remove_hw_breakpoint} are set to call these functions.
977The argument is a @code{struct bp_target_info *}, as described in
978the documentation for @code{target_insert_breakpoint}.
979These functions work like @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} and
980@code{i386_remove_watchpoint}, respectively, except that they set up
981the debug registers to watch instruction execution, and each
982hardware-assisted breakpoint always requires exactly one debug
983register.
984
985@findex i386_cleanup_dregs
986@item i386_cleanup_dregs (void)
987This function clears all the reference counts, addresses, and control
988bits in the mirror images of the debug registers.  It doesn't affect
989the actual debug registers in the inferior process.
990@end table
991
992@noindent
993@strong{Notes:}
994@enumerate 1
995@item
996x86 processors support setting watchpoints on I/O reads or writes.
997However, since no target supports this (as of March 2001), and since
998@code{enum target_hw_bp_type} doesn't even have an enumeration for I/O
999watchpoints, this feature is not yet available to @value{GDBN} running
1000on x86.
1001
1002@item
1003x86 processors can enable watchpoints locally, for the current task
1004only, or globally, for all the tasks.  For each debug register,
1005there's a bit in the DR7 Debug Control register that determines
1006whether the associated address is watched locally or globally.  The
1007current implementation of x86 watchpoint support in @value{GDBN}
1008always sets watchpoints to be locally enabled, since global
1009watchpoints might interfere with the underlying OS and are probably
1010unavailable in many platforms.
1011@end enumerate
1012
1013@section Checkpoints
1014@cindex checkpoints
1015@cindex restart
1016In the abstract, a checkpoint is a point in the execution history of
1017the program, which the user may wish to return to at some later time.
1018
1019Internally, a checkpoint is a saved copy of the program state, including
1020whatever information is required in order to restore the program to that
1021state at a later time.  This can be expected to include the state of
1022registers and memory, and may include external state such as the state
1023of open files and devices.
1024
1025There are a number of ways in which checkpoints may be implemented
1026in gdb, e.g.@: as corefiles, as forked processes, and as some opaque
1027method implemented on the target side.
1028
1029A corefile can be used to save an image of target memory and register
1030state, which can in principle be restored later --- but corefiles do
1031not typically include information about external entities such as
1032open files.  Currently this method is not implemented in gdb.
1033
1034A forked process can save the state of user memory and registers,
1035as well as some subset of external (kernel) state.  This method
1036is used to implement checkpoints on Linux, and in principle might
1037be used on other systems.
1038
1039Some targets, e.g.@: simulators, might have their own built-in
1040method for saving checkpoints, and gdb might be able to take
1041advantage of that capability without necessarily knowing any
1042details of how it is done.
1043
1044
1045@section Observing changes in @value{GDBN} internals
1046@cindex observer pattern interface
1047@cindex notifications about changes in internals
1048
1049In order to function properly, several modules need to be notified when
1050some changes occur in the @value{GDBN} internals.  Traditionally, these
1051modules have relied on several paradigms, the most common ones being
1052hooks and gdb-events.  Unfortunately, none of these paradigms was
1053versatile enough to become the standard notification mechanism in
1054@value{GDBN}.  The fact that they only supported one ``client'' was also
1055a strong limitation.
1056
1057A new paradigm, based on the Observer pattern of the @cite{Design
1058Patterns} book, has therefore been implemented.  The goal was to provide
1059a new interface overcoming the issues with the notification mechanisms
1060previously available.  This new interface needed to be strongly typed,
1061easy to extend, and versatile enough to be used as the standard
1062interface when adding new notifications.
1063
1064See @ref{GDB Observers} for a brief description of the observers
1065currently implemented in GDB. The rationale for the current
1066implementation is also briefly discussed.
1067
1068@node User Interface
1069
1070@chapter User Interface
1071
1072@value{GDBN} has several user interfaces, of which the traditional
1073command-line interface is perhaps the most familiar.
1074
1075@section Command Interpreter
1076
1077@cindex command interpreter
1078@cindex CLI
1079The command interpreter in @value{GDBN} is fairly simple.  It is designed to
1080allow for the set of commands to be augmented dynamically, and also
1081has a recursive subcommand capability, where the first argument to
1082a command may itself direct a lookup on a different command list.
1083
1084For instance, the @samp{set} command just starts a lookup on the
1085@code{setlist} command list, while @samp{set thread} recurses
1086to the @code{set_thread_cmd_list}.
1087
1088@findex add_cmd
1089@findex add_com
1090To add commands in general, use @code{add_cmd}.  @code{add_com} adds to
1091the main command list, and should be used for those commands.  The usual
1092place to add commands is in the @code{_initialize_@var{xyz}} routines at
1093the ends of most source files.
1094
1095@findex add_setshow_cmd
1096@findex add_setshow_cmd_full
1097To add paired @samp{set} and @samp{show} commands, use
1098@code{add_setshow_cmd} or @code{add_setshow_cmd_full}.  The former is
1099a slightly simpler interface which is useful when you don't need to
1100further modify the new command structures, while the latter returns
1101the new command structures for manipulation.
1102
1103@cindex deprecating commands
1104@findex deprecate_cmd
1105Before removing commands from the command set it is a good idea to
1106deprecate them for some time.  Use @code{deprecate_cmd} on commands or
1107aliases to set the deprecated flag.  @code{deprecate_cmd} takes a
1108@code{struct cmd_list_element} as it's first argument.  You can use the
1109return value from @code{add_com} or @code{add_cmd} to deprecate the
1110command immediately after it is created.
1111
1112The first time a command is used the user will be warned and offered a
1113replacement (if one exists). Note that the replacement string passed to
1114@code{deprecate_cmd} should be the full name of the command, i.e., the
1115entire string the user should type at the command line.
1116
1117@anchor{UI-Independent Output}
1118@section UI-Independent Output---the @code{ui_out} Functions
1119@c This section is based on the documentation written by Fernando
1120@c Nasser <fnasser@redhat.com>.
1121
1122@cindex @code{ui_out} functions
1123The @code{ui_out} functions present an abstraction level for the
1124@value{GDBN} output code.  They hide the specifics of different user
1125interfaces supported by @value{GDBN}, and thus free the programmer
1126from the need to write several versions of the same code, one each for
1127every UI, to produce output.
1128
1129@subsection Overview and Terminology
1130
1131In general, execution of each @value{GDBN} command produces some sort
1132of output, and can even generate an input request.
1133
1134Output can be generated for the following purposes:
1135
1136@itemize @bullet
1137@item
1138to display a @emph{result} of an operation;
1139
1140@item
1141to convey @emph{info} or produce side-effects of a requested
1142operation;
1143
1144@item
1145to provide a @emph{notification} of an asynchronous event (including
1146progress indication of a prolonged asynchronous operation);
1147
1148@item
1149to display @emph{error messages} (including warnings);
1150
1151@item
1152to show @emph{debug data};
1153
1154@item
1155to @emph{query} or prompt a user for input (a special case).
1156@end itemize
1157
1158@noindent
1159This section mainly concentrates on how to build result output,
1160although some of it also applies to other kinds of output.
1161
1162Generation of output that displays the results of an operation
1163involves one or more of the following:
1164
1165@itemize @bullet
1166@item
1167output of the actual data
1168
1169@item
1170formatting the output as appropriate for console output, to make it
1171easily readable by humans
1172
1173@item
1174machine oriented formatting--a more terse formatting to allow for easy
1175parsing by programs which read @value{GDBN}'s output
1176
1177@item
1178annotation, whose purpose is to help legacy GUIs to identify interesting
1179parts in the output
1180@end itemize
1181
1182The @code{ui_out} routines take care of the first three aspects.
1183Annotations are provided by separate annotation routines.  Note that use
1184of annotations for an interface between a GUI and @value{GDBN} is
1185deprecated.
1186
1187Output can be in the form of a single item, which we call a @dfn{field};
1188a @dfn{list} consisting of identical fields; a @dfn{tuple} consisting of
1189non-identical fields; or a @dfn{table}, which is a tuple consisting of a
1190header and a body.  In a BNF-like form:
1191
1192@table @code
1193@item <table> @expansion{}
1194@code{<header> <body>}
1195@item <header> @expansion{}
1196@code{@{ <column> @}}
1197@item <column> @expansion{}
1198@code{<width> <alignment> <title>}
1199@item <body> @expansion{}
1200@code{@{<row>@}}
1201@end table
1202
1203
1204@subsection General Conventions
1205
1206Most @code{ui_out} routines are of type @code{void}, the exceptions are
1207@code{ui_out_stream_new} (which returns a pointer to the newly created
1208object) and the @code{make_cleanup} routines.
1209
1210The first parameter is always the @code{ui_out} vector object, a pointer
1211to a @code{struct ui_out}.
1212
1213The @var{format} parameter is like in @code{printf} family of functions.
1214When it is present, there must also be a variable list of arguments
1215sufficient used to satisfy the @code{%} specifiers in the supplied
1216format.
1217
1218When a character string argument is not used in a @code{ui_out} function
1219call, a @code{NULL} pointer has to be supplied instead.
1220
1221
1222@subsection Table, Tuple and List Functions
1223
1224@cindex list output functions
1225@cindex table output functions
1226@cindex tuple output functions
1227This section introduces @code{ui_out} routines for building lists,
1228tuples and tables.  The routines to output the actual data items
1229(fields) are presented in the next section.
1230
1231To recap: A @dfn{tuple} is a sequence of @dfn{fields}, each field
1232containing information about an object; a @dfn{list} is a sequence of
1233fields where each field describes an identical object.
1234
1235Use the @dfn{table} functions when your output consists of a list of
1236rows (tuples) and the console output should include a heading.  Use this
1237even when you are listing just one object but you still want the header.
1238
1239@cindex nesting level in @code{ui_out} functions
1240Tables can not be nested.  Tuples and lists can be nested up to a
1241maximum of five levels.
1242
1243The overall structure of the table output code is something like this:
1244
1245@smallexample
1246  ui_out_table_begin
1247    ui_out_table_header
1248    @dots{}
1249    ui_out_table_body
1250      ui_out_tuple_begin
1251        ui_out_field_*
1252        @dots{}
1253      ui_out_tuple_end
1254      @dots{}
1255  ui_out_table_end
1256@end smallexample
1257
1258Here is the description of table-, tuple- and list-related @code{ui_out}
1259functions:
1260
1261@deftypefun void ui_out_table_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nbrofcols}, int @var{nr_rows}, const char *@var{tblid})
1262The function @code{ui_out_table_begin} marks the beginning of the output
1263of a table.  It should always be called before any other @code{ui_out}
1264function for a given table.  @var{nbrofcols} is the number of columns in
1265the table. @var{nr_rows} is the number of rows in the table.
1266@var{tblid} is an optional string identifying the table.  The string
1267pointed to by @var{tblid} is copied by the implementation of
1268@code{ui_out_table_begin}, so the application can free the string if it
1269was @code{malloc}ed.
1270
1271The companion function @code{ui_out_table_end}, described below, marks
1272the end of the table's output.
1273@end deftypefun
1274
1275@deftypefun void ui_out_table_header (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{colhdr})
1276@code{ui_out_table_header} provides the header information for a single
1277table column.  You call this function several times, one each for every
1278column of the table, after @code{ui_out_table_begin}, but before
1279@code{ui_out_table_body}.
1280
1281The value of @var{width} gives the column width in characters.  The
1282value of @var{alignment} is one of @code{left}, @code{center}, and
1283@code{right}, and it specifies how to align the header: left-justify,
1284center, or right-justify it.  @var{colhdr} points to a string that
1285specifies the column header; the implementation copies that string, so
1286column header strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed after the
1287call.
1288@end deftypefun
1289
1290@deftypefun void ui_out_table_body (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1291This function delimits the table header from the table body.
1292@end deftypefun
1293
1294@deftypefun void ui_out_table_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1295This function signals the end of a table's output.  It should be called
1296after the table body has been produced by the list and field output
1297functions.
1298
1299There should be exactly one call to @code{ui_out_table_end} for each
1300call to @code{ui_out_table_begin}, otherwise the @code{ui_out} functions
1301will signal an internal error.
1302@end deftypefun
1303
1304The output of the tuples that represent the table rows must follow the
1305call to @code{ui_out_table_body} and precede the call to
1306@code{ui_out_table_end}.  You build a tuple by calling
1307@code{ui_out_tuple_begin} and @code{ui_out_tuple_end}, with suitable
1308calls to functions which actually output fields between them.
1309
1310@deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1311This function marks the beginning of a tuple output.  @var{id} points
1312to an optional string that identifies the tuple; it is copied by the
1313implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1314after the call.
1315@end deftypefun
1316
1317@deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1318This function signals an end of a tuple output.  There should be exactly
1319one call to @code{ui_out_tuple_end} for each call to
1320@code{ui_out_tuple_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1321be signaled.
1322@end deftypefun
1323
1324@deftypefun {struct cleanup *} make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1325This function first opens the tuple and then establishes a cleanup
1326(@pxref{Misc Guidelines, Cleanups}) to close the tuple.
1327It provides a convenient and correct implementation of the
1328non-portable@footnote{The function cast is not portable ISO C.} code sequence:
1329@smallexample
1330struct cleanup *old_cleanup;
1331ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "...");
1332old_cleanup = make_cleanup ((void(*)(void *)) ui_out_tuple_end,
1333                            uiout);
1334@end smallexample
1335@end deftypefun
1336
1337@deftypefun void ui_out_list_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1338This function marks the beginning of a list output.  @var{id} points to
1339an optional string that identifies the list; it is copied by the
1340implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1341after the call.
1342@end deftypefun
1343
1344@deftypefun void ui_out_list_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1345This function signals an end of a list output.  There should be exactly
1346one call to @code{ui_out_list_end} for each call to
1347@code{ui_out_list_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1348be signaled.
1349@end deftypefun
1350
1351@deftypefun {struct cleanup *} make_cleanup_ui_out_list_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1352Similar to @code{make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end}, this function
1353opens a list and then establishes cleanup
1354(@pxref{Misc Guidelines, Cleanups})
1355that will close the list.
1356@end deftypefun
1357
1358@subsection Item Output Functions
1359
1360@cindex item output functions
1361@cindex field output functions
1362@cindex data output
1363The functions described below produce output for the actual data
1364items, or fields, which contain information about the object.
1365
1366Choose the appropriate function accordingly to your particular needs.
1367
1368@deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{fldname}, char *@var{format}, ...)
1369This is the most general output function.  It produces the
1370representation of the data in the variable-length argument list
1371according to formatting specifications in @var{format}, a
1372@code{printf}-like format string.  The optional argument @var{fldname}
1373supplies the name of the field.  The data items themselves are
1374supplied as additional arguments after @var{format}.
1375
1376This generic function should be used only when it is not possible to
1377use one of the specialized versions (see below).
1378@end deftypefun
1379
1380@deftypefun void ui_out_field_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1381This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable.  It uses the
1382@code{"%d"} output conversion specification.  @var{fldname} specifies
1383the name of the field.
1384@end deftypefun
1385
1386@deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1387This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable.  It differs from
1388@code{ui_out_field_int} in that the caller specifies the desired @var{width} and @var{alignment} of the output.
1389@var{fldname} specifies
1390the name of the field.
1391@end deftypefun
1392
1393@deftypefun void ui_out_field_core_addr (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{address})
1394This function outputs an address as appropriate for @var{gdbarch}.
1395@end deftypefun
1396
1397@deftypefun void ui_out_field_string (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, const char *@var{string})
1398This function outputs a string using the @code{"%s"} conversion
1399specification.
1400@end deftypefun
1401
1402Sometimes, there's a need to compose your output piece by piece using
1403functions that operate on a stream, such as @code{value_print} or
1404@code{fprintf_symbol_filtered}.  These functions accept an argument of
1405the type @code{struct ui_file *}, a pointer to a @code{ui_file} object
1406used to store the data stream used for the output.  When you use one
1407of these functions, you need a way to pass their results stored in a
1408@code{ui_file} object to the @code{ui_out} functions.  To this end,
1409you first create a @code{ui_stream} object by calling
1410@code{ui_out_stream_new}, pass the @code{stream} member of that
1411@code{ui_stream} object to @code{value_print} and similar functions,
1412and finally call @code{ui_out_field_stream} to output the field you
1413constructed.  When the @code{ui_stream} object is no longer needed,
1414you should destroy it and free its memory by calling
1415@code{ui_out_stream_delete}.
1416
1417@deftypefun {struct ui_stream *} ui_out_stream_new (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1418This function creates a new @code{ui_stream} object which uses the
1419same output methods as the @code{ui_out} object whose pointer is
1420passed in @var{uiout}.  It returns a pointer to the newly created
1421@code{ui_stream} object.
1422@end deftypefun
1423
1424@deftypefun void ui_out_stream_delete (struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1425This functions destroys a @code{ui_stream} object specified by
1426@var{streambuf}.
1427@end deftypefun
1428
1429@deftypefun void ui_out_field_stream (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fieldname}, struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1430This function consumes all the data accumulated in
1431@code{streambuf->stream} and outputs it like
1432@code{ui_out_field_string} does.  After a call to
1433@code{ui_out_field_stream}, the accumulated data no longer exists, but
1434the stream is still valid and may be used for producing more fields.
1435@end deftypefun
1436
1437@strong{Important:} If there is any chance that your code could bail
1438out before completing output generation and reaching the point where
1439@code{ui_out_stream_delete} is called, it is necessary to set up a
1440cleanup, to avoid leaking memory and other resources.  Here's a
1441skeleton code to do that:
1442
1443@smallexample
1444 struct ui_stream *mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1445 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1446 ...
1447 do_cleanups (old);
1448@end smallexample
1449
1450If the function already has the old cleanup chain set (for other kinds
1451of cleanups), you just have to add your cleanup to it:
1452
1453@smallexample
1454  mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1455  make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1456@end smallexample
1457
1458Note that with cleanups in place, you should not call
1459@code{ui_out_stream_delete} directly, or you would attempt to free the
1460same buffer twice.
1461
1462@subsection Utility Output Functions
1463
1464@deftypefun void ui_out_field_skip (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname})
1465This function skips a field in a table.  Use it if you have to leave
1466an empty field without disrupting the table alignment.  The argument
1467@var{fldname} specifies a name for the (missing) filed.
1468@end deftypefun
1469
1470@deftypefun void ui_out_text (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{string})
1471This function outputs the text in @var{string} in a way that makes it
1472easy to be read by humans.  For example, the console implementation of
1473this method filters the text through a built-in pager, to prevent it
1474from scrolling off the visible portion of the screen.
1475
1476Use this function for printing relatively long chunks of text around
1477the actual field data: the text it produces is not aligned according
1478to the table's format.  Use @code{ui_out_field_string} to output a
1479string field, and use @code{ui_out_message}, described below, to
1480output short messages.
1481@end deftypefun
1482
1483@deftypefun void ui_out_spaces (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nspaces})
1484This function outputs @var{nspaces} spaces.  It is handy to align the
1485text produced by @code{ui_out_text} with the rest of the table or
1486list.
1487@end deftypefun
1488
1489@deftypefun void ui_out_message (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{verbosity}, const char *@var{format}, ...)
1490This function produces a formatted message, provided that the current
1491verbosity level is at least as large as given by @var{verbosity}.  The
1492current verbosity level is specified by the user with the @samp{set
1493verbositylevel} command.@footnote{As of this writing (April 2001),
1494setting verbosity level is not yet implemented, and is always returned
1495as zero.  So calling @code{ui_out_message} with a @var{verbosity}
1496argument more than zero will cause the message to never be printed.}
1497@end deftypefun
1498
1499@deftypefun void ui_out_wrap_hint (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{indent})
1500This function gives the console output filter (a paging filter) a hint
1501of where to break lines which are too long.  Ignored for all other
1502output consumers.  @var{indent}, if non-@code{NULL}, is the string to
1503be printed to indent the wrapped text on the next line; it must remain
1504accessible until the next call to @code{ui_out_wrap_hint}, or until an
1505explicit newline is produced by one of the other functions.  If
1506@var{indent} is @code{NULL}, the wrapped text will not be indented.
1507@end deftypefun
1508
1509@deftypefun void ui_out_flush (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1510This function flushes whatever output has been accumulated so far, if
1511the UI buffers output.
1512@end deftypefun
1513
1514
1515@subsection Examples of Use of @code{ui_out} functions
1516
1517@cindex using @code{ui_out} functions
1518@cindex @code{ui_out} functions, usage examples
1519This section gives some practical examples of using the @code{ui_out}
1520functions to generalize the old console-oriented code in
1521@value{GDBN}.  The examples all come from functions defined on the
1522@file{breakpoints.c} file.
1523
1524This example, from the @code{breakpoint_1} function, shows how to
1525produce a table.
1526
1527The original code was:
1528
1529@smallexample
1530 if (!found_a_breakpoint++)
1531   @{
1532     annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1533
1534     annotate_field (0);
1535     printf_filtered ("Num ");
1536     annotate_field (1);
1537     printf_filtered ("Type           ");
1538     annotate_field (2);
1539     printf_filtered ("Disp ");
1540     annotate_field (3);
1541     printf_filtered ("Enb ");
1542     if (addressprint)
1543       @{
1544         annotate_field (4);
1545         printf_filtered ("Address    ");
1546       @}
1547     annotate_field (5);
1548     printf_filtered ("What\n");
1549
1550     annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1551   @}
1552@end smallexample
1553
1554Here's the new version:
1555
1556@smallexample
1557  nr_printable_breakpoints = @dots{};
1558
1559  if (addressprint)
1560    ui_out_table_begin (ui, 6, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1561  else
1562    ui_out_table_begin (ui, 5, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1563
1564  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1565    annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1566  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1567    annotate_field (0);
1568  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "number", "Num");		/* 1 */
1569  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1570    annotate_field (1);
1571  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 14, ui_left, "type", "Type");		/* 2 */
1572  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1573    annotate_field (2);
1574  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 4, ui_left, "disp", "Disp");		/* 3 */
1575  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1576    annotate_field (3);
1577  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "enabled", "Enb");	/* 4 */
1578  if (addressprint)
1579    @{
1580     if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1581       annotate_field (4);
1582     if (print_address_bits <= 32)
1583       ui_out_table_header (uiout, 10, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1584     else
1585       ui_out_table_header (uiout, 18, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1586    @}
1587  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1588    annotate_field (5);
1589  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 40, ui_noalign, "what", "What");	/* 6 */
1590  ui_out_table_body (uiout);
1591  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1592    annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1593@end smallexample
1594
1595This example, from the @code{print_one_breakpoint} function, shows how
1596to produce the actual data for the table whose structure was defined
1597in the above example.  The original code was:
1598
1599@smallexample
1600   annotate_record ();
1601   annotate_field (0);
1602   printf_filtered ("%-3d ", b->number);
1603   annotate_field (1);
1604   if ((int)b->type > (sizeof(bptypes)/sizeof(bptypes[0]))
1605       || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1606     internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1607                     (int)b->type);
1608   printf_filtered ("%-14s ", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1609   annotate_field (2);
1610   printf_filtered ("%-4s ", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1611   annotate_field (3);
1612   printf_filtered ("%-3c ", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1613   @dots{}
1614@end smallexample
1615
1616This is the new version:
1617
1618@smallexample
1619   annotate_record ();
1620   ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "bkpt");
1621   annotate_field (0);
1622   ui_out_field_int (uiout, "number", b->number);
1623   annotate_field (1);
1624   if (((int) b->type > (sizeof (bptypes) / sizeof (bptypes[0])))
1625       || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1626     internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1627                     (int) b->type);
1628   ui_out_field_string (uiout, "type", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1629   annotate_field (2);
1630   ui_out_field_string (uiout, "disp", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1631   annotate_field (3);
1632   ui_out_field_fmt (uiout, "enabled", "%c", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1633   @dots{}
1634@end smallexample
1635
1636This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to
1637produce a complicated output field using the @code{print_expression}
1638functions which requires a stream to be passed.  It also shows how to
1639automate stream destruction with cleanups.  The original code was:
1640
1641@smallexample
1642    annotate_field (5);
1643    print_expression (b->exp, gdb_stdout);
1644@end smallexample
1645
1646The new version is:
1647
1648@smallexample
1649  struct ui_stream *stb = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1650  struct cleanup *old_chain = make_cleanup_ui_out_stream_delete (stb);
1651  ...
1652  annotate_field (5);
1653  print_expression (b->exp, stb->stream);
1654  ui_out_field_stream (uiout, "what", local_stream);
1655@end smallexample
1656
1657This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to use
1658@code{ui_out_text} and @code{ui_out_field_string}.  The original code
1659was:
1660
1661@smallexample
1662  annotate_field (5);
1663  if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1664    printf_filtered ("<any library> ");
1665  else
1666    printf_filtered ("library \"%s\" ", b->dll_pathname);
1667@end smallexample
1668
1669It became:
1670
1671@smallexample
1672  annotate_field (5);
1673  if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1674    @{
1675      ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", "<any library>");
1676      ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1677    @}
1678  else
1679    @{
1680      ui_out_text (uiout, "library \"");
1681      ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->dll_pathname);
1682      ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1683    @}
1684@end smallexample
1685
1686The following example from @code{print_one_breakpoint} shows how to
1687use @code{ui_out_field_int} and @code{ui_out_spaces}.  The original
1688code was:
1689
1690@smallexample
1691  annotate_field (5);
1692  if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1693    printf_filtered ("process %d ", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1694@end smallexample
1695
1696It became:
1697
1698@smallexample
1699  annotate_field (5);
1700  if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1701    @{
1702      ui_out_text (uiout, "process ");
1703      ui_out_field_int (uiout, "what", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1704      ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1705    @}
1706@end smallexample
1707
1708Here's an example of using @code{ui_out_field_string}.  The original
1709code was:
1710
1711@smallexample
1712  annotate_field (5);
1713  if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1714    printf_filtered ("program \"%s\" ", b->exec_pathname);
1715@end smallexample
1716
1717It became:
1718
1719@smallexample
1720  annotate_field (5);
1721  if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1722    @{
1723      ui_out_text (uiout, "program \"");
1724      ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->exec_pathname);
1725      ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1726    @}
1727@end smallexample
1728
1729Finally, here's an example of printing an address.  The original code:
1730
1731@smallexample
1732  annotate_field (4);
1733  printf_filtered ("%s ",
1734        hex_string_custom ((unsigned long) b->address, 8));
1735@end smallexample
1736
1737It became:
1738
1739@smallexample
1740  annotate_field (4);
1741  ui_out_field_core_addr (uiout, "Address", b->address);
1742@end smallexample
1743
1744
1745@section Console Printing
1746
1747@section TUI
1748
1749@node libgdb
1750
1751@chapter libgdb
1752
1753@section libgdb 1.0
1754@cindex @code{libgdb}
1755@code{libgdb} 1.0 was an abortive project of years ago.  The theory was
1756to provide an API to @value{GDBN}'s functionality.
1757
1758@section libgdb 2.0
1759@cindex @code{libgdb}
1760@code{libgdb} 2.0 is an ongoing effort to update @value{GDBN} so that is
1761better able to support graphical and other environments.
1762
1763Since @code{libgdb} development is on-going, its architecture is still
1764evolving.  The following components have so far been identified:
1765
1766@itemize @bullet
1767@item
1768Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}.
1769@item
1770Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1771@item
1772Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1773@item
1774Library - @file{gdb.h}
1775@end itemize
1776
1777The model that ties these components together is described below.
1778
1779@section The @code{libgdb} Model
1780
1781A client of @code{libgdb} interacts with the library in two ways.
1782
1783@itemize @bullet
1784@item
1785As an observer (using @file{gdb-events}) receiving notifications from
1786@code{libgdb} of any internal state changes (break point changes, run
1787state, etc).
1788@item
1789As a client querying @code{libgdb} (using the @file{ui-out} builder) to
1790obtain various status values from @value{GDBN}.
1791@end itemize
1792
1793Since @code{libgdb} could have multiple clients (e.g., a GUI supporting
1794the existing @value{GDBN} CLI), those clients must co-operate when
1795controlling @code{libgdb}.  In particular, a client must ensure that
1796@code{libgdb} is idle (i.e.@: no other client is using @code{libgdb})
1797before responding to a @file{gdb-event} by making a query.
1798
1799@section CLI support
1800
1801At present @value{GDBN}'s CLI is very much entangled in with the core of
1802@code{libgdb}.  Consequently, a client wishing to include the CLI in
1803their interface needs to carefully co-ordinate its own and the CLI's
1804requirements.
1805
1806It is suggested that the client set @code{libgdb} up to be bi-modal
1807(alternate between CLI and client query modes).  The notes below sketch
1808out the theory:
1809
1810@itemize @bullet
1811@item
1812The client registers itself as an observer of @code{libgdb}.
1813@item
1814The client create and install @code{cli-out} builder using its own
1815versions of the @code{ui-file} @code{gdb_stderr}, @code{gdb_stdtarg} and
1816@code{gdb_stdout} streams.
1817@item
1818The client creates a separate custom @code{ui-out} builder that is only
1819used while making direct queries to @code{libgdb}.
1820@end itemize
1821
1822When the client receives input intended for the CLI, it simply passes it
1823along.  Since the @code{cli-out} builder is installed by default, all
1824the CLI output in response to that command is routed (pronounced rooted)
1825through to the client controlled @code{gdb_stdout} et.@: al.@: streams.
1826At the same time, the client is kept abreast of internal changes by
1827virtue of being a @code{libgdb} observer.
1828
1829The only restriction on the client is that it must wait until
1830@code{libgdb} becomes idle before initiating any queries (using the
1831client's custom builder).
1832
1833@section @code{libgdb} components
1834
1835@subheading Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}
1836@file{gdb-events} provides the client with a very raw mechanism that can
1837be used to implement an observer.  At present it only allows for one
1838observer and that observer must, internally, handle the need to delay
1839the processing of any event notifications until after @code{libgdb} has
1840finished the current command.
1841
1842@subheading Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1843@file{ui-out} provides the infrastructure necessary for a client to
1844create a builder.  That builder is then passed down to @code{libgdb}
1845when doing any queries.
1846
1847@subheading Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1848@c There could be an entire section on the event-loop
1849@file{event-loop}, currently non-re-entrant, provides a simple event
1850loop.  A client would need to either plug its self into this loop or,
1851implement a new event-loop that @value{GDBN} would use.
1852
1853The event-loop will eventually be made re-entrant.  This is so that
1854@value{GDBN} can better handle the problem of some commands blocking
1855instead of returning.
1856
1857@subheading Library - @file{gdb.h}
1858@file{libgdb} is the most obvious component of this system.  It provides
1859the query interface.  Each function is parameterized by a @code{ui-out}
1860builder.  The result of the query is constructed using that builder
1861before the query function returns.
1862
1863@node Values
1864@chapter Values
1865@section Values
1866
1867@cindex values
1868@cindex @code{value} structure
1869@value{GDBN} uses @code{struct value}, or @dfn{values}, as an internal
1870abstraction for the representation of a variety of inferior objects
1871and @value{GDBN} convenience objects.
1872
1873Values have an associated @code{struct type}, that describes a virtual
1874view of the raw data or object stored in or accessed through the
1875value.
1876
1877A value is in addition discriminated by its lvalue-ness, given its
1878@code{enum lval_type} enumeration type:
1879
1880@cindex @code{lval_type} enumeration, for values.
1881@table @code
1882@item @code{not_lval}
1883This value is not an lval.  It can't be assigned to.
1884
1885@item @code{lval_memory}
1886This value represents an object in memory.
1887
1888@item @code{lval_register}
1889This value represents an object that lives in a register.
1890
1891@item @code{lval_internalvar}
1892Represents the value of an internal variable.
1893
1894@item @code{lval_internalvar_component}
1895Represents part of a @value{GDBN} internal variable.  E.g., a
1896structure field.
1897
1898@cindex computed values
1899@item @code{lval_computed}
1900These are ``computed'' values.  They allow creating specialized value
1901objects for specific purposes, all abstracted away from the core value
1902support code.  The creator of such a value writes specialized
1903functions to handle the reading and writing to/from the value's
1904backend data, and optionally, a ``copy operator'' and a
1905``destructor''.
1906
1907Pointers to these functions are stored in a @code{struct lval_funcs}
1908instance (declared in @file{value.h}), and passed to the
1909@code{allocate_computed_value} function, as in the example below.
1910
1911@smallexample
1912static void
1913nil_value_read (struct value *v)
1914@{
1915  /* This callback reads data from some backend, and stores it in V.
1916     In this case, we always read null data.  You'll want to fill in
1917     something more interesting.  */
1918
1919  memset (value_contents_all_raw (v),
1920          value_offset (v),
1921          TYPE_LENGTH (value_type (v)));
1922@}
1923
1924static void
1925nil_value_write (struct value *v, struct value *fromval)
1926@{
1927  /* Takes the data from FROMVAL and stores it in the backend of V.  */
1928
1929  to_oblivion (value_contents_all_raw (fromval),
1930               value_offset (v),
1931               TYPE_LENGTH (value_type (fromval)));
1932@}
1933
1934static struct lval_funcs nil_value_funcs =
1935  @{
1936    nil_value_read,
1937    nil_value_write
1938  @};
1939
1940struct value *
1941make_nil_value (void)
1942@{
1943   struct type *type;
1944   struct value *v;
1945
1946   type = make_nils_type ();
1947   v = allocate_computed_value (type, &nil_value_funcs, NULL);
1948
1949   return v;
1950@}
1951@end smallexample
1952
1953See the implementation of the @code{$_siginfo} convenience variable in
1954@file{infrun.c} as a real example use of lval_computed.
1955
1956@end table
1957
1958@node Stack Frames
1959@chapter Stack Frames
1960
1961@cindex frame
1962@cindex call stack frame
1963A frame is a construct that @value{GDBN} uses to keep track of calling
1964and called functions.
1965
1966@cindex unwind frame
1967@value{GDBN}'s frame model, a fresh design, was implemented with the
1968need to support @sc{dwarf}'s Call Frame Information in mind.  In fact,
1969the term ``unwind'' is taken directly from that specification.
1970Developers wishing to learn more about unwinders, are encouraged to
1971read the @sc{dwarf} specification, available from
1972@url{http://www.dwarfstd.org}.
1973
1974@findex frame_register_unwind
1975@findex get_frame_register
1976@value{GDBN}'s model is that you find a frame's registers by
1977``unwinding'' them from the next younger frame.  That is,
1978@samp{get_frame_register} which returns the value of a register in
1979frame #1 (the next-to-youngest frame), is implemented by calling frame
1980#0's @code{frame_register_unwind} (the youngest frame).  But then the
1981obvious question is: how do you access the registers of the youngest
1982frame itself?
1983
1984@cindex sentinel frame
1985@findex get_frame_type
1986@vindex SENTINEL_FRAME
1987To answer this question, @value{GDBN} has the @dfn{sentinel} frame, the
1988``-1st'' frame.  Unwinding registers from the sentinel frame gives you
1989the current values of the youngest real frame's registers.  If @var{f}
1990is a sentinel frame, then @code{get_frame_type (@var{f}) @equiv{}
1991SENTINEL_FRAME}.
1992
1993@section Selecting an Unwinder
1994
1995@findex frame_unwind_prepend_unwinder
1996@findex frame_unwind_append_unwinder
1997The architecture registers a list of frame unwinders (@code{struct
1998frame_unwind}), using the functions
1999@code{frame_unwind_prepend_unwinder} and
2000@code{frame_unwind_append_unwinder}.  Each unwinder includes a
2001sniffer.  Whenever @value{GDBN} needs to unwind a frame (to fetch the
2002previous frame's registers or the current frame's ID), it calls
2003registered sniffers in order to find one which recognizes the frame.
2004The first time a sniffer returns non-zero, the corresponding unwinder
2005is assigned to the frame.
2006
2007@section Unwinding the Frame ID
2008@cindex frame ID
2009
2010Every frame has an associated ID, of type @code{struct frame_id}.
2011The ID includes the stack base and function start address for
2012the frame.  The ID persists through the entire life of the frame,
2013including while other called frames are running; it is used to
2014locate an appropriate @code{struct frame_info} from the cache.
2015
2016Every time the inferior stops, and at various other times, the frame
2017cache is flushed.  Because of this, parts of @value{GDBN} which need
2018to keep track of individual frames cannot use pointers to @code{struct
2019frame_info}.  A frame ID provides a stable reference to a frame, even
2020when the unwinder must be run again to generate a new @code{struct
2021frame_info} for the same frame.
2022
2023The frame's unwinder's @code{this_id} method is called to find the ID.
2024Note that this is different from register unwinding, where the next
2025frame's @code{prev_register} is called to unwind this frame's
2026registers.
2027
2028Both stack base and function address are required to identify the
2029frame, because a recursive function has the same function address for
2030two consecutive frames and a leaf function may have the same stack
2031address as its caller.  On some platforms, a third address is part of
2032the ID to further disambiguate frames---for instance, on IA-64
2033the separate register stack address is included in the ID.
2034
2035An invalid frame ID (@code{outer_frame_id}) returned from the
2036@code{this_id} method means to stop unwinding after this frame.
2037
2038@code{null_frame_id} is another invalid frame ID which should be used
2039when there is no frame.  For instance, certain breakpoints are attached
2040to a specific frame, and that frame is identified through its frame ID
2041(we use this to implement the "finish" command).  Using
2042@code{null_frame_id} as the frame ID for a given breakpoint means
2043that the breakpoint is not specific to any frame.  The @code{this_id}
2044method should never return @code{null_frame_id}.
2045
2046@section Unwinding Registers
2047
2048Each unwinder includes a @code{prev_register} method.  This method
2049takes a frame, an associated cache pointer, and a register number.
2050It returns a @code{struct value *} describing the requested register,
2051as saved by this frame.  This is the value of the register that is
2052current in this frame's caller.
2053
2054The returned value must have the same type as the register.  It may
2055have any lvalue type.  In most circumstances one of these routines
2056will generate the appropriate value:
2057
2058@table @code
2059@item frame_unwind_got_optimized
2060@findex frame_unwind_got_optimized
2061This register was not saved.
2062
2063@item frame_unwind_got_register
2064@findex frame_unwind_got_register
2065This register was copied into another register in this frame.  This
2066is also used for unchanged registers; they are ``copied'' into the
2067same register.
2068
2069@item frame_unwind_got_memory
2070@findex frame_unwind_got_memory
2071This register was saved in memory.
2072
2073@item frame_unwind_got_constant
2074@findex frame_unwind_got_constant
2075This register was not saved, but the unwinder can compute the previous
2076value some other way.
2077
2078@item frame_unwind_got_address
2079@findex frame_unwind_got_address
2080Same as @code{frame_unwind_got_constant}, except that the value is a target
2081address.  This is frequently used for the stack pointer, which is not
2082explicitly saved but has a known offset from this frame's stack
2083pointer.  For architectures with a flat unified address space, this is
2084generally the same as @code{frame_unwind_got_constant}.
2085@end table
2086
2087@node Symbol Handling
2088
2089@chapter Symbol Handling
2090
2091Symbols are a key part of @value{GDBN}'s operation.  Symbols include
2092variables, functions, and types.
2093
2094Symbol information for a large program can be truly massive, and
2095reading of symbol information is one of the major performance
2096bottlenecks in @value{GDBN}; it can take many minutes to process it
2097all.  Studies have shown that nearly all the time spent is
2098computational, rather than file reading.
2099
2100One of the ways for @value{GDBN} to provide a good user experience is
2101to start up quickly, taking no more than a few seconds.  It is simply
2102not possible to process all of a program's debugging info in that
2103time, and so we attempt to handle symbols incrementally.  For instance,
2104we create @dfn{partial symbol tables} consisting of only selected
2105symbols, and only expand them to full symbol tables when necessary.
2106
2107@section Symbol Reading
2108
2109@cindex symbol reading
2110@cindex reading of symbols
2111@cindex symbol files
2112@value{GDBN} reads symbols from @dfn{symbol files}.  The usual symbol
2113file is the file containing the program which @value{GDBN} is
2114debugging.  @value{GDBN} can be directed to use a different file for
2115symbols (with the @samp{symbol-file} command), and it can also read
2116more symbols via the @samp{add-file} and @samp{load} commands. In
2117addition, it may bring in more symbols while loading shared
2118libraries.
2119
2120@findex find_sym_fns
2121Symbol files are initially opened by code in @file{symfile.c} using
2122the BFD library (@pxref{Support Libraries}).  BFD identifies the type
2123of the file by examining its header.  @code{find_sym_fns} then uses
2124this identification to locate a set of symbol-reading functions.
2125
2126@findex add_symtab_fns
2127@cindex @code{sym_fns} structure
2128@cindex adding a symbol-reading module
2129Symbol-reading modules identify themselves to @value{GDBN} by calling
2130@code{add_symtab_fns} during their module initialization.  The argument
2131to @code{add_symtab_fns} is a @code{struct sym_fns} which contains the
2132name (or name prefix) of the symbol format, the length of the prefix,
2133and pointers to four functions.  These functions are called at various
2134times to process symbol files whose identification matches the specified
2135prefix.
2136
2137The functions supplied by each module are:
2138
2139@table @code
2140@item @var{xyz}_symfile_init(struct sym_fns *sf)
2141
2142@cindex secondary symbol file
2143Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when we are about to read a new
2144symbol file.  This function should clean up any internal state (possibly
2145resulting from half-read previous files, for example) and prepare to
2146read a new symbol file.  Note that the symbol file which we are reading
2147might be a new ``main'' symbol file, or might be a secondary symbol file
2148whose symbols are being added to the existing symbol table.
2149
2150The argument to @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init} is a newly allocated
2151@code{struct sym_fns} whose @code{bfd} field contains the BFD for the
2152new symbol file being read.  Its @code{private} field has been zeroed,
2153and can be modified as desired.  Typically, a struct of private
2154information will be @code{malloc}'d, and a pointer to it will be placed
2155in the @code{private} field.
2156
2157There is no result from @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, but it can call
2158@code{error} if it detects an unavoidable problem.
2159
2160@item @var{xyz}_new_init()
2161
2162Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when discarding existing symbols.
2163This function needs only handle the symbol-reading module's internal
2164state; the symbol table data structures visible to the rest of
2165@value{GDBN} will be discarded by @code{symbol_file_add}.  It has no
2166arguments and no result.  It may be called after
2167@code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, if a new symbol table is being read, or
2168may be called alone if all symbols are simply being discarded.
2169
2170@item @var{xyz}_symfile_read(struct sym_fns *sf, CORE_ADDR addr, int mainline)
2171
2172Called from @code{symbol_file_add} to actually read the symbols from a
2173symbol-file into a set of psymtabs or symtabs.
2174
2175@code{sf} points to the @code{struct sym_fns} originally passed to
2176@code{@var{xyz}_sym_init} for possible initialization.  @code{addr} is
2177the offset between the file's specified start address and its true
2178address in memory.  @code{mainline} is 1 if this is the main symbol
2179table being read, and 0 if a secondary symbol file (e.g., shared library
2180or dynamically loaded file) is being read.@refill
2181@end table
2182
2183In addition, if a symbol-reading module creates psymtabs when
2184@var{xyz}_symfile_read is called, these psymtabs will contain a pointer
2185to a function @code{@var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab}, which can be called
2186from any point in the @value{GDBN} symbol-handling code.
2187
2188@table @code
2189@item @var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab (struct partial_symtab *pst)
2190
2191Called from @code{psymtab_to_symtab} (or the @code{PSYMTAB_TO_SYMTAB} macro) if
2192the psymtab has not already been read in and had its @code{pst->symtab}
2193pointer set.  The argument is the psymtab to be fleshed-out into a
2194symtab.  Upon return, @code{pst->readin} should have been set to 1, and
2195@code{pst->symtab} should contain a pointer to the new corresponding symtab, or
2196zero if there were no symbols in that part of the symbol file.
2197@end table
2198
2199@section Partial Symbol Tables
2200
2201@value{GDBN} has three types of symbol tables:
2202
2203@itemize @bullet
2204@cindex full symbol table
2205@cindex symtabs
2206@item
2207Full symbol tables (@dfn{symtabs}).  These contain the main
2208information about symbols and addresses.
2209
2210@cindex psymtabs
2211@item
2212Partial symbol tables (@dfn{psymtabs}).  These contain enough
2213information to know when to read the corresponding part of the full
2214symbol table.
2215
2216@cindex minimal symbol table
2217@cindex minsymtabs
2218@item
2219Minimal symbol tables (@dfn{msymtabs}).  These contain information
2220gleaned from non-debugging symbols.
2221@end itemize
2222
2223@cindex partial symbol table
2224This section describes partial symbol tables.
2225
2226A psymtab is constructed by doing a very quick pass over an executable
2227file's debugging information.  Small amounts of information are
2228extracted---enough to identify which parts of the symbol table will
2229need to be re-read and fully digested later, when the user needs the
2230information.  The speed of this pass causes @value{GDBN} to start up very
2231quickly.  Later, as the detailed rereading occurs, it occurs in small
2232pieces, at various times, and the delay therefrom is mostly invisible to
2233the user.
2234@c (@xref{Symbol Reading}.)
2235
2236The symbols that show up in a file's psymtab should be, roughly, those
2237visible to the debugger's user when the program is not running code from
2238that file.  These include external symbols and types, static symbols and
2239types, and @code{enum} values declared at file scope.
2240
2241The psymtab also contains the range of instruction addresses that the
2242full symbol table would represent.
2243
2244@cindex finding a symbol
2245@cindex symbol lookup
2246The idea is that there are only two ways for the user (or much of the
2247code in the debugger) to reference a symbol:
2248
2249@itemize @bullet
2250@findex find_pc_function
2251@findex find_pc_line
2252@item
2253By its address (e.g., execution stops at some address which is inside a
2254function in this file).  The address will be noticed to be in the
2255range of this psymtab, and the full symtab will be read in.
2256@code{find_pc_function}, @code{find_pc_line}, and other
2257@code{find_pc_@dots{}} functions handle this.
2258
2259@cindex lookup_symbol
2260@item
2261By its name
2262(e.g., the user asks to print a variable, or set a breakpoint on a
2263function).  Global names and file-scope names will be found in the
2264psymtab, which will cause the symtab to be pulled in.  Local names will
2265have to be qualified by a global name, or a file-scope name, in which
2266case we will have already read in the symtab as we evaluated the
2267qualifier.  Or, a local symbol can be referenced when we are ``in'' a
2268local scope, in which case the first case applies.  @code{lookup_symbol}
2269does most of the work here.
2270@end itemize
2271
2272The only reason that psymtabs exist is to cause a symtab to be read in
2273at the right moment.  Any symbol that can be elided from a psymtab,
2274while still causing that to happen, should not appear in it.  Since
2275psymtabs don't have the idea of scope, you can't put local symbols in
2276them anyway.  Psymtabs don't have the idea of the type of a symbol,
2277either, so types need not appear, unless they will be referenced by
2278name.
2279
2280It is a bug for @value{GDBN} to behave one way when only a psymtab has
2281been read, and another way if the corresponding symtab has been read
2282in.  Such bugs are typically caused by a psymtab that does not contain
2283all the visible symbols, or which has the wrong instruction address
2284ranges.
2285
2286The psymtab for a particular section of a symbol file (objfile) could be
2287thrown away after the symtab has been read in.  The symtab should always
2288be searched before the psymtab, so the psymtab will never be used (in a
2289bug-free environment).  Currently, psymtabs are allocated on an obstack,
2290and all the psymbols themselves are allocated in a pair of large arrays
2291on an obstack, so there is little to be gained by trying to free them
2292unless you want to do a lot more work.
2293
2294Whether or not psymtabs are created depends on the objfile's symbol
2295reader.  The core of @value{GDBN} hides the details of partial symbols
2296and partial symbol tables behind a set of function pointers known as
2297the @dfn{quick symbol functions}.  These are documented in
2298@file{symfile.h}.
2299
2300@section Types
2301
2302@unnumberedsubsec Fundamental Types (e.g., @code{FT_VOID}, @code{FT_BOOLEAN}).
2303
2304@cindex fundamental types
2305These are the fundamental types that @value{GDBN} uses internally.  Fundamental
2306types from the various debugging formats (stabs, ELF, etc) are mapped
2307into one of these.  They are basically a union of all fundamental types
2308that @value{GDBN} knows about for all the languages that @value{GDBN}
2309knows about.
2310
2311@unnumberedsubsec Type Codes (e.g., @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}, @code{TYPE_CODE_ARRAY}).
2312
2313@cindex type codes
2314Each time @value{GDBN} builds an internal type, it marks it with one
2315of these types.  The type may be a fundamental type, such as
2316@code{TYPE_CODE_INT}, or a derived type, such as @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}
2317which is a pointer to another type.  Typically, several @code{FT_*}
2318types map to one @code{TYPE_CODE_*} type, and are distinguished by
2319other members of the type struct, such as whether the type is signed
2320or unsigned, and how many bits it uses.
2321
2322@unnumberedsubsec Builtin Types (e.g., @code{builtin_type_void}, @code{builtin_type_char}).
2323
2324These are instances of type structs that roughly correspond to
2325fundamental types and are created as global types for @value{GDBN} to
2326use for various ugly historical reasons.  We eventually want to
2327eliminate these.  Note for example that @code{builtin_type_int}
2328initialized in @file{gdbtypes.c} is basically the same as a
2329@code{TYPE_CODE_INT} type that is initialized in @file{c-lang.c} for
2330an @code{FT_INTEGER} fundamental type.  The difference is that the
2331@code{builtin_type} is not associated with any particular objfile, and
2332only one instance exists, while @file{c-lang.c} builds as many
2333@code{TYPE_CODE_INT} types as needed, with each one associated with
2334some particular objfile.
2335
2336@section Object File Formats
2337@cindex object file formats
2338
2339@subsection a.out
2340
2341@cindex @code{a.out} format
2342The @code{a.out} format is the original file format for Unix.  It
2343consists of three sections: @code{text}, @code{data}, and @code{bss},
2344which are for program code, initialized data, and uninitialized data,
2345respectively.
2346
2347The @code{a.out} format is so simple that it doesn't have any reserved
2348place for debugging information.  (Hey, the original Unix hackers used
2349@samp{adb}, which is a machine-language debugger!)  The only debugging
2350format for @code{a.out} is stabs, which is encoded as a set of normal
2351symbols with distinctive attributes.
2352
2353The basic @code{a.out} reader is in @file{dbxread.c}.
2354
2355@subsection COFF
2356
2357@cindex COFF format
2358The COFF format was introduced with System V Release 3 (SVR3) Unix.
2359COFF files may have multiple sections, each prefixed by a header.  The
2360number of sections is limited.
2361
2362The COFF specification includes support for debugging.  Although this
2363was a step forward, the debugging information was woefully limited.
2364For instance, it was not possible to represent code that came from an
2365included file.  GNU's COFF-using configs often use stabs-type info,
2366encapsulated in special sections.
2367
2368The COFF reader is in @file{coffread.c}.
2369
2370@subsection ECOFF
2371
2372@cindex ECOFF format
2373ECOFF is an extended COFF originally introduced for Mips and Alpha
2374workstations.
2375
2376The basic ECOFF reader is in @file{mipsread.c}.
2377
2378@subsection XCOFF
2379
2380@cindex XCOFF format
2381The IBM RS/6000 running AIX uses an object file format called XCOFF.
2382The COFF sections, symbols, and line numbers are used, but debugging
2383symbols are @code{dbx}-style stabs whose strings are located in the
2384@code{.debug} section (rather than the string table).  For more
2385information, see @ref{Top,,,stabs,The Stabs Debugging Format}.
2386
2387The shared library scheme has a clean interface for figuring out what
2388shared libraries are in use, but the catch is that everything which
2389refers to addresses (symbol tables and breakpoints at least) needs to be
2390relocated for both shared libraries and the main executable.  At least
2391using the standard mechanism this can only be done once the program has
2392been run (or the core file has been read).
2393
2394@subsection PE
2395
2396@cindex PE-COFF format
2397Windows 95 and NT use the PE (@dfn{Portable Executable}) format for their
2398executables.  PE is basically COFF with additional headers.
2399
2400While BFD includes special PE support, @value{GDBN} needs only the basic
2401COFF reader.
2402
2403@subsection ELF
2404
2405@cindex ELF format
2406The ELF format came with System V Release 4 (SVR4) Unix.  ELF is
2407similar to COFF in being organized into a number of sections, but it
2408removes many of COFF's limitations.  Debugging info may be either stabs
2409encapsulated in ELF sections, or more commonly these days, DWARF.
2410
2411The basic ELF reader is in @file{elfread.c}.
2412
2413@subsection SOM
2414
2415@cindex SOM format
2416SOM is HP's object file and debug format (not to be confused with IBM's
2417SOM, which is a cross-language ABI).
2418
2419The SOM reader is in @file{somread.c}.
2420
2421@section Debugging File Formats
2422
2423This section describes characteristics of debugging information that
2424are independent of the object file format.
2425
2426@subsection stabs
2427
2428@cindex stabs debugging info
2429@code{stabs} started out as special symbols within the @code{a.out}
2430format.  Since then, it has been encapsulated into other file
2431formats, such as COFF and ELF.
2432
2433While @file{dbxread.c} does some of the basic stab processing,
2434including for encapsulated versions, @file{stabsread.c} does
2435the real work.
2436
2437@subsection COFF
2438
2439@cindex COFF debugging info
2440The basic COFF definition includes debugging information.  The level
2441of support is minimal and non-extensible, and is not often used.
2442
2443@subsection Mips debug (Third Eye)
2444
2445@cindex ECOFF debugging info
2446ECOFF includes a definition of a special debug format.
2447
2448The file @file{mdebugread.c} implements reading for this format.
2449
2450@c mention DWARF 1 as a formerly-supported format
2451
2452@subsection DWARF 2
2453
2454@cindex DWARF 2 debugging info
2455DWARF 2 is an improved but incompatible version of DWARF 1.
2456
2457The DWARF 2 reader is in @file{dwarf2read.c}.
2458
2459@subsection Compressed DWARF 2
2460
2461@cindex Compressed DWARF 2 debugging info
2462Compressed DWARF 2 is not technically a separate debugging format, but
2463merely DWARF 2 debug information that has been compressed.  In this
2464format, every object-file section holding DWARF 2 debugging
2465information is compressed and prepended with a header.  (The section
2466is also typically renamed, so a section called @code{.debug_info} in a
2467DWARF 2 binary would be called @code{.zdebug_info} in a compressed
2468DWARF 2 binary.)  The header is 12 bytes long:
2469
2470@itemize @bullet
2471@item
24724 bytes: the literal string ``ZLIB''
2473@item
24748 bytes: the uncompressed size of the section, in big-endian byte
2475order.
2476@end itemize
2477
2478The same reader is used for both compressed an normal DWARF 2 info.
2479Section decompression is done in @code{zlib_decompress_section} in
2480@file{dwarf2read.c}.
2481
2482@subsection DWARF 3
2483
2484@cindex DWARF 3 debugging info
2485DWARF 3 is an improved version of DWARF 2.
2486
2487@subsection SOM
2488
2489@cindex SOM debugging info
2490Like COFF, the SOM definition includes debugging information.
2491
2492@section Adding a New Symbol Reader to @value{GDBN}
2493
2494@cindex adding debugging info reader
2495If you are using an existing object file format (@code{a.out}, COFF, ELF, etc),
2496there is probably little to be done.
2497
2498If you need to add a new object file format, you must first add it to
2499BFD.  This is beyond the scope of this document.
2500
2501You must then arrange for the BFD code to provide access to the
2502debugging symbols.  Generally @value{GDBN} will have to call swapping
2503routines from BFD and a few other BFD internal routines to locate the
2504debugging information.  As much as possible, @value{GDBN} should not
2505depend on the BFD internal data structures.
2506
2507For some targets (e.g., COFF), there is a special transfer vector used
2508to call swapping routines, since the external data structures on various
2509platforms have different sizes and layouts.  Specialized routines that
2510will only ever be implemented by one object file format may be called
2511directly.  This interface should be described in a file
2512@file{bfd/lib@var{xyz}.h}, which is included by @value{GDBN}.
2513
2514@section Memory Management for Symbol Files
2515
2516Most memory associated with a loaded symbol file is stored on
2517its @code{objfile_obstack}.  This includes symbols, types,
2518namespace data, and other information produced by the symbol readers.
2519
2520Because this data lives on the objfile's obstack, it is automatically
2521released when the objfile is unloaded or reloaded.  Therefore one
2522objfile must not reference symbol or type data from another objfile;
2523they could be unloaded at different times.
2524
2525User convenience variables, et cetera, have associated types.  Normally
2526these types live in the associated objfile.  However, when the objfile
2527is unloaded, those types are deep copied to global memory, so that
2528the values of the user variables and history items are not lost.
2529
2530
2531@node Language Support
2532
2533@chapter Language Support
2534
2535@cindex language support
2536@value{GDBN}'s language support is mainly driven by the symbol reader,
2537although it is possible for the user to set the source language
2538manually.
2539
2540@value{GDBN} chooses the source language by looking at the extension
2541of the file recorded in the debug info; @file{.c} means C, @file{.f}
2542means Fortran, etc.  It may also use a special-purpose language
2543identifier if the debug format supports it, like with DWARF.
2544
2545@section Adding a Source Language to @value{GDBN}
2546
2547@cindex adding source language
2548To add other languages to @value{GDBN}'s expression parser, follow the
2549following steps:
2550
2551@table @emph
2552@item Create the expression parser.
2553
2554@cindex expression parser
2555This should reside in a file @file{@var{lang}-exp.y}.  Routines for
2556building parsed expressions into a @code{union exp_element} list are in
2557@file{parse.c}.
2558
2559@cindex language parser
2560Since we can't depend upon everyone having Bison, and YACC produces
2561parsers that define a bunch of global names, the following lines
2562@strong{must} be included at the top of the YACC parser, to prevent the
2563various parsers from defining the same global names:
2564
2565@smallexample
2566#define yyparse         @var{lang}_parse
2567#define yylex           @var{lang}_lex
2568#define yyerror         @var{lang}_error
2569#define yylval          @var{lang}_lval
2570#define yychar          @var{lang}_char
2571#define yydebug         @var{lang}_debug
2572#define yypact          @var{lang}_pact
2573#define yyr1            @var{lang}_r1
2574#define yyr2            @var{lang}_r2
2575#define yydef           @var{lang}_def
2576#define yychk           @var{lang}_chk
2577#define yypgo           @var{lang}_pgo
2578#define yyact           @var{lang}_act
2579#define yyexca          @var{lang}_exca
2580#define yyerrflag       @var{lang}_errflag
2581#define yynerrs         @var{lang}_nerrs
2582@end smallexample
2583
2584At the bottom of your parser, define a @code{struct language_defn} and
2585initialize it with the right values for your language.  Define an
2586@code{initialize_@var{lang}} routine and have it call
2587@samp{add_language(@var{lang}_language_defn)} to tell the rest of @value{GDBN}
2588that your language exists.  You'll need some other supporting variables
2589and functions, which will be used via pointers from your
2590@code{@var{lang}_language_defn}.  See the declaration of @code{struct
2591language_defn} in @file{language.h}, and the other @file{*-exp.y} files,
2592for more information.
2593
2594@item Add any evaluation routines, if necessary
2595
2596@cindex expression evaluation routines
2597@findex evaluate_subexp
2598@findex prefixify_subexp
2599@findex length_of_subexp
2600If you need new opcodes (that represent the operations of the language),
2601add them to the enumerated type in @file{expression.h}.  Add support
2602code for these operations in the @code{evaluate_subexp} function
2603defined in the file @file{eval.c}.  Add cases
2604for new opcodes in two functions from @file{parse.c}:
2605@code{prefixify_subexp} and @code{length_of_subexp}.  These compute
2606the number of @code{exp_element}s that a given operation takes up.
2607
2608@item Update some existing code
2609
2610Add an enumerated identifier for your language to the enumerated type
2611@code{enum language} in @file{defs.h}.
2612
2613Update the routines in @file{language.c} so your language is included.
2614These routines include type predicates and such, which (in some cases)
2615are language dependent.  If your language does not appear in the switch
2616statement, an error is reported.
2617
2618@vindex current_language
2619Also included in @file{language.c} is the code that updates the variable
2620@code{current_language}, and the routines that translate the
2621@code{language_@var{lang}} enumerated identifier into a printable
2622string.
2623
2624@findex _initialize_language
2625Update the function @code{_initialize_language} to include your
2626language.  This function picks the default language upon startup, so is
2627dependent upon which languages that @value{GDBN} is built for.
2628
2629@findex allocate_symtab
2630Update @code{allocate_symtab} in @file{symfile.c} and/or symbol-reading
2631code so that the language of each symtab (source file) is set properly.
2632This is used to determine the language to use at each stack frame level.
2633Currently, the language is set based upon the extension of the source
2634file.  If the language can be better inferred from the symbol
2635information, please set the language of the symtab in the symbol-reading
2636code.
2637
2638@findex print_subexp
2639@findex op_print_tab
2640Add helper code to @code{print_subexp} (in @file{expprint.c}) to handle any new
2641expression opcodes you have added to @file{expression.h}.  Also, add the
2642printed representations of your operators to @code{op_print_tab}.
2643
2644@item Add a place of call
2645
2646@findex parse_exp_1
2647Add a call to @code{@var{lang}_parse()} and @code{@var{lang}_error} in
2648@code{parse_exp_1} (defined in @file{parse.c}).
2649
2650@item Edit @file{Makefile.in}
2651
2652Add dependencies in @file{Makefile.in}.  Make sure you update the macro
2653variables such as @code{HFILES} and @code{OBJS}, otherwise your code may
2654not get linked in, or, worse yet, it may not get @code{tar}red into the
2655distribution!
2656@end table
2657
2658
2659@node Host Definition
2660
2661@chapter Host Definition
2662
2663With the advent of Autoconf, it's rarely necessary to have host
2664definition machinery anymore.  The following information is provided,
2665mainly, as an historical reference.
2666
2667@section Adding a New Host
2668
2669@cindex adding a new host
2670@cindex host, adding
2671@value{GDBN}'s host configuration support normally happens via Autoconf.
2672New host-specific definitions should not be needed.  Older hosts
2673@value{GDBN} still use the host-specific definitions and files listed
2674below, but these mostly exist for historical reasons, and will
2675eventually disappear.
2676
2677@table @file
2678@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
2679This file is a Makefile fragment that once contained both host and
2680native configuration information (@pxref{Native Debugging}) for the
2681machine @var{xyz}.  The host configuration information is now handled
2682by Autoconf.
2683
2684Host configuration information included definitions for @code{CC},
2685@code{SYSV_DEFINE}, @code{XM_CFLAGS}, @code{XM_ADD_FILES},
2686@code{XM_CLIBS}, @code{XM_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
2687
2688New host-only configurations do not need this file.
2689
2690@end table
2691
2692(Files named @file{gdb/config/@var{arch}/xm-@var{xyz}.h} were once
2693used to define host-specific macros, but were no longer needed and
2694have all been removed.)
2695
2696@subheading Generic Host Support Files
2697
2698@cindex generic host support
2699There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
2700various systems.
2701
2702@table @file
2703@cindex remote debugging support
2704@cindex serial line support
2705@item ser-unix.c
2706This contains serial line support for Unix systems.  It is included by
2707default on all Unix-like hosts.
2708
2709@item ser-pipe.c
2710This contains serial pipe support for Unix systems.  It is included by
2711default on all Unix-like hosts.
2712
2713@item ser-mingw.c
2714This contains serial line support for 32-bit programs running under
2715Windows using MinGW.
2716
2717@item ser-go32.c
2718This contains serial line support for 32-bit programs running under DOS,
2719using the DJGPP (a.k.a.@: GO32) execution environment.
2720
2721@cindex TCP remote support
2722@item ser-tcp.c
2723This contains generic TCP support using sockets.  It is included by
2724default on all Unix-like hosts and with MinGW.
2725@end table
2726
2727@section Host Conditionals
2728
2729When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
2730defined or left undefined, to control compilation based on the
2731attributes of the host system.  While formerly they could be set in
2732host-specific header files, at present they can be changed only by
2733setting @code{CFLAGS} when building, or by editing the source code.
2734
2735These macros and their meanings (or if the meaning is not documented
2736here, then one of the source files where they are used is indicated)
2737are:
2738
2739@ftable @code
2740@item @value{GDBN}INIT_FILENAME
2741The default name of @value{GDBN}'s initialization file (normally
2742@file{.gdbinit}).
2743
2744@item SIGWINCH_HANDLER
2745If your host defines @code{SIGWINCH}, you can define this to be the name
2746of a function to be called if @code{SIGWINCH} is received.
2747
2748@item SIGWINCH_HANDLER_BODY
2749Define this to expand into code that will define the function named by
2750the expansion of @code{SIGWINCH_HANDLER}.
2751
2752@item CRLF_SOURCE_FILES
2753@cindex DOS text files
2754Define this if host files use @code{\r\n} rather than @code{\n} as a
2755line terminator.  This will cause source file listings to omit @code{\r}
2756characters when printing and it will allow @code{\r\n} line endings of files
2757which are ``sourced'' by gdb.  It must be possible to open files in binary
2758mode using @code{O_BINARY} or, for fopen, @code{"rb"}.
2759
2760@item DEFAULT_PROMPT
2761@cindex prompt
2762The default value of the prompt string (normally @code{"(gdb) "}).
2763
2764@item DEV_TTY
2765@cindex terminal device
2766The name of the generic TTY device, defaults to @code{"/dev/tty"}.
2767
2768@item ISATTY
2769Substitute for isatty, if not available.
2770
2771@item FOPEN_RB
2772Define this if binary files are opened the same way as text files.
2773
2774@item CC_HAS_LONG_LONG
2775@cindex @code{long long} data type
2776Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long long}.  This is set
2777by the @code{configure} script.
2778
2779@item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_LONG
2780Define this if the host can handle printing of long long integers via
2781the printf format conversion specifier @code{ll}.  This is set by the
2782@code{configure} script.
2783
2784@item LSEEK_NOT_LINEAR
2785Define this if @code{lseek (n)} does not necessarily move to byte number
2786@code{n} in the file.  This is only used when reading source files.  It
2787is normally faster to define @code{CRLF_SOURCE_FILES} when possible.
2788
2789@item lint
2790Define this to help placate @code{lint} in some situations.
2791
2792@item volatile
2793Define this to override the defaults of @code{__volatile__} or
2794@code{/**/}.
2795@end ftable
2796
2797
2798@node Target Architecture Definition
2799
2800@chapter Target Architecture Definition
2801
2802@cindex target architecture definition
2803@value{GDBN}'s target architecture defines what sort of
2804machine-language programs @value{GDBN} can work with, and how it works
2805with them.
2806
2807The target architecture object is implemented as the C structure
2808@code{struct gdbarch *}.  The structure, and its methods, are generated
2809using the Bourne shell script @file{gdbarch.sh}.
2810
2811@menu
2812* OS ABI Variant Handling::
2813* Initialize New Architecture::
2814* Registers and Memory::
2815* Pointers and Addresses::
2816* Address Classes::
2817* Register Representation::
2818* Frame Interpretation::
2819* Inferior Call Setup::
2820* Adding support for debugging core files::
2821* Defining Other Architecture Features::
2822* Adding a New Target::
2823@end menu
2824
2825@node  OS ABI Variant Handling
2826@section Operating System ABI Variant Handling
2827@cindex OS ABI variants
2828
2829@value{GDBN} provides a mechanism for handling variations in OS
2830ABIs.  An OS ABI variant may have influence over any number of
2831variables in the target architecture definition.  There are two major
2832components in the OS ABI mechanism: sniffers and handlers.
2833
2834A @dfn{sniffer} examines a file matching a BFD architecture/flavour pair
2835(the architecture may be wildcarded) in an attempt to determine the
2836OS ABI of that file.  Sniffers with a wildcarded architecture are considered
2837to be @dfn{generic}, while sniffers for a specific architecture are
2838considered to be @dfn{specific}.  A match from a specific sniffer
2839overrides a match from a generic sniffer.  Multiple sniffers for an
2840architecture/flavour may exist, in order to differentiate between two
2841different operating systems which use the same basic file format.  The
2842OS ABI framework provides a generic sniffer for ELF-format files which
2843examines the @code{EI_OSABI} field of the ELF header, as well as note
2844sections known to be used by several operating systems.
2845
2846@cindex fine-tuning @code{gdbarch} structure
2847A @dfn{handler} is used to fine-tune the @code{gdbarch} structure for the
2848selected OS ABI.  There may be only one handler for a given OS ABI
2849for each BFD architecture.
2850
2851The following OS ABI variants are defined in @file{defs.h}:
2852
2853@table @code
2854
2855@findex GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2856@item GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2857Used for struct gdbarch_info if ABI is still uninitialized.
2858
2859@findex GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2860@item GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2861The ABI of the inferior is unknown.  The default @code{gdbarch}
2862settings for the architecture will be used.
2863
2864@findex GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2865@item GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2866UNIX System V Release 4.
2867
2868@findex GDB_OSABI_HURD
2869@item GDB_OSABI_HURD
2870GNU using the Hurd kernel.
2871
2872@findex GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2873@item GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2874Sun Solaris.
2875
2876@findex GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2877@item GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2878OSF/1, including Digital UNIX and Compaq Tru64 UNIX.
2879
2880@findex GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2881@item GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2882GNU using the Linux kernel.
2883
2884@findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2885@item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2886FreeBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2887
2888@findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2889@item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2890FreeBSD using the ELF executable format.
2891
2892@findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2893@item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2894NetBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2895
2896@findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2897@item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2898NetBSD using the ELF executable format.
2899
2900@findex GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2901@item GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2902OpenBSD using the ELF executable format.
2903
2904@findex GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2905@item GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2906Windows CE.
2907
2908@findex GDB_OSABI_GO32
2909@item GDB_OSABI_GO32
2910DJGPP.
2911
2912@findex GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2913@item GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2914Irix.
2915
2916@findex GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2917@item GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2918Interix (Posix layer for MS-Windows systems).
2919
2920@findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2921@item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2922HP/UX using the ELF executable format.
2923
2924@findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2925@item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2926HP/UX using the SOM executable format.
2927
2928@findex GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2929@item GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2930QNX Neutrino.
2931
2932@findex GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2933@item GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2934Cygwin.
2935
2936@findex GDB_OSABI_AIX
2937@item GDB_OSABI_AIX
2938AIX.
2939
2940@end table
2941
2942Here are the functions that make up the OS ABI framework:
2943
2944@deftypefun {const char *} gdbarch_osabi_name (enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2945Return the name of the OS ABI corresponding to @var{osabi}.
2946@end deftypefun
2947
2948@deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, unsigned long @var{machine}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi}, void (*@var{init_osabi})(struct gdbarch_info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}))
2949Register the OS ABI handler specified by @var{init_osabi} for the
2950architecture, machine type and OS ABI specified by @var{arch},
2951@var{machine} and @var{osabi}.  In most cases, a value of zero for the
2952machine type, which implies the architecture's default machine type,
2953will suffice.
2954@end deftypefun
2955
2956@deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi_sniffer (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, enum bfd_flavour @var{flavour}, enum gdb_osabi (*@var{sniffer})(bfd *@var{abfd}))
2957Register the OS ABI file sniffer specified by @var{sniffer} for the
2958BFD architecture/flavour pair specified by @var{arch} and @var{flavour}.
2959If @var{arch} is @code{bfd_arch_unknown}, the sniffer is considered to
2960be generic, and is allowed to examine @var{flavour}-flavoured files for
2961any architecture.
2962@end deftypefun
2963
2964@deftypefun {enum gdb_osabi} gdbarch_lookup_osabi (bfd *@var{abfd})
2965Examine the file described by @var{abfd} to determine its OS ABI.
2966The value @code{GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN} is returned if the OS ABI cannot
2967be determined.
2968@end deftypefun
2969
2970@deftypefun void gdbarch_init_osabi (struct gdbarch info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2971Invoke the OS ABI handler corresponding to @var{osabi} to fine-tune the
2972@code{gdbarch} structure specified by @var{gdbarch}.  If a handler
2973corresponding to @var{osabi} has not been registered for @var{gdbarch}'s
2974architecture, a warning will be issued and the debugging session will continue
2975with the defaults already established for @var{gdbarch}.
2976@end deftypefun
2977
2978@deftypefun void generic_elf_osabi_sniff_abi_tag_sections (bfd *@var{abfd}, asection *@var{sect}, void *@var{obj})
2979Helper routine for ELF file sniffers.  Examine the file described by
2980@var{abfd} and look at ABI tag note sections to determine the OS ABI
2981from the note.  This function should be called via
2982@code{bfd_map_over_sections}.
2983@end deftypefun
2984
2985@node Initialize New Architecture
2986@section Initializing a New Architecture
2987
2988@menu
2989* How an Architecture is Represented::
2990* Looking Up an Existing Architecture::
2991* Creating a New Architecture::
2992@end menu
2993
2994@node How an Architecture is Represented
2995@subsection How an Architecture is Represented
2996@cindex architecture representation
2997@cindex representation of architecture
2998
2999Each @code{gdbarch} is associated with a single @sc{bfd} architecture,
3000via a @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}} in the @code{bfd_architecture}
3001enumeration.  The @code{gdbarch} is registered by a call to
3002@code{register_gdbarch_init}, usually from the file's
3003@code{_initialize_@var{filename}} routine, which will be automatically
3004called during @value{GDBN} startup.  The arguments are a @sc{bfd}
3005architecture constant and an initialization function.
3006
3007@findex _initialize_@var{arch}_tdep
3008@cindex @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}
3009A @value{GDBN} description for a new architecture, @var{arch} is created by
3010defining a global function @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep}, by
3011convention in the source file @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}.  For example,
3012in the case of the OpenRISC 1000, this function is called
3013@code{_initialize_or1k_tdep} and is found in the file
3014@file{or1k-tdep.c}.
3015
3016@cindex @file{configure.tgt}
3017@cindex @code{gdbarch}
3018@findex gdbarch_register
3019The resulting object files containing the implementation of the
3020@code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function are specified in the @value{GDBN}
3021@file{configure.tgt} file, which includes a large case statement
3022pattern matching against the @code{--target} option of the
3023@code{configure} script.  The new @code{struct gdbarch} is created
3024within the @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function by calling
3025@code{gdbarch_register}:
3026
3027@smallexample
3028void gdbarch_register (enum bfd_architecture    @var{architecture},
3029                       gdbarch_init_ftype      *@var{init_func},
3030                       gdbarch_dump_tdep_ftype *@var{tdep_dump_func});
3031@end smallexample
3032
3033The @var{architecture} will identify the unique @sc{bfd} to be
3034associated with this @code{gdbarch}.  The @var{init_func} funciton is
3035called to create and return the new @code{struct gdbarch}.  The
3036@var{tdep_dump_func} function will dump the target specific details
3037associated with this architecture.
3038
3039For example the function @code{_initialize_or1k_tdep} creates its
3040architecture for 32-bit OpenRISC 1000 architectures by calling:
3041
3042@smallexample
3043gdbarch_register (bfd_arch_or32, or1k_gdbarch_init, or1k_dump_tdep);
3044@end smallexample
3045
3046@node Looking Up an Existing Architecture
3047@subsection Looking Up an Existing Architecture
3048@cindex @code{gdbarch} lookup
3049
3050The initialization function has this prototype:
3051
3052@smallexample
3053static struct gdbarch *
3054@var{arch}_gdbarch_init (struct gdbarch_info @var{info},
3055                         struct gdbarch_list *@var{arches})
3056@end smallexample
3057
3058The @var{info} argument contains parameters used to select the correct
3059architecture, and @var{arches} is a list of architectures which
3060have already been created with the same @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}}
3061value.
3062
3063The initialization function should first make sure that @var{info}
3064is acceptable, and return @code{NULL} if it is not.  Then, it should
3065search through @var{arches} for an exact match to @var{info}, and
3066return one if found.  Lastly, if no exact match was found, it should
3067create a new architecture based on @var{info} and return it.
3068
3069@findex gdbarch_list_lookup_by_info
3070@cindex @code{gdbarch_info}
3071The lookup is done using @code{gdbarch_list_lookup_by_info}.  It is
3072passed the list of existing architectures, @var{arches}, and the
3073@code{struct gdbarch_info}, @var{info}, and returns the first matching
3074architecture it finds, or @code{NULL} if none are found.  If an
3075architecture is found it can be returned as the result from the
3076initialization function, otherwise a new @code{struct gdbach} will need
3077to be created.
3078
3079The struct gdbarch_info has the following components:
3080
3081@smallexample
3082struct gdbarch_info
3083@{
3084   const struct bfd_arch_info *bfd_arch_info;
3085   int                         byte_order;
3086   bfd                        *abfd;
3087   struct gdbarch_tdep_info   *tdep_info;
3088   enum gdb_osabi              osabi;
3089   const struct target_desc   *target_desc;
3090@};
3091@end smallexample
3092
3093@vindex bfd_arch_info
3094The @code{bfd_arch_info} member holds the key details about the
3095architecture.  The @code{byte_order} member is a value in an
3096enumeration indicating the endianism.  The @code{abfd} member is a
3097pointer to the full @sc{bfd}, the @code{tdep_info} member is
3098additional custom target specific information, @code{osabi} identifies
3099which (if any) of a number of operating specific ABIs are used by this
3100architecture and the @code{target_desc} member is a set of name-value
3101pairs with information about register usage in this target.
3102
3103When the @code{struct gdbarch} initialization function is called, not
3104all the fields are provided---only those which can be deduced from the
3105@sc{bfd}.  The @code{struct gdbarch_info}, @var{info} is used as a
3106look-up key with the list of existing architectures, @var{arches} to
3107see if a suitable architecture already exists.  The @var{tdep_info},
3108@var{osabi} and @var{target_desc} fields may be added before this
3109lookup to refine the search.
3110
3111Only information in @var{info} should be used to choose the new
3112architecture.  Historically, @var{info} could be sparse, and
3113defaults would be collected from the first element on @var{arches}.
3114However, @value{GDBN} now fills in @var{info} more thoroughly,
3115so new @code{gdbarch} initialization functions should not take
3116defaults from @var{arches}.
3117
3118@node Creating a New Architecture
3119@subsection Creating a New Architecture
3120@cindex @code{struct gdbarch} creation
3121
3122@findex gdbarch_alloc
3123@cindex @code{gdbarch_tdep} when allocating new @code{gdbarch}
3124If no architecture is found, then a new architecture must be created,
3125by calling @code{gdbarch_alloc} using the supplied @code{@w{struct
3126gdbarch_info}} and any additional custom target specific
3127information in a @code{struct gdbarch_tdep}.  The prototype for
3128@code{gdbarch_alloc} is:
3129
3130@smallexample
3131struct gdbarch *gdbarch_alloc (const struct gdbarch_info *@var{info},
3132                               struct gdbarch_tdep       *@var{tdep});
3133@end smallexample
3134
3135@cindex @code{set_gdbarch} functions
3136@cindex @code{gdbarch} accessor functions
3137The newly created struct gdbarch must then be populated.  Although
3138there are default values, in most cases they are not what is
3139required.
3140
3141For each element, @var{X}, there is are a pair of corresponding accessor
3142functions, one to set the value of that element,
3143@code{set_gdbarch_@var{X}}, the second to either get the value of an
3144element (if it is a variable) or to apply the element (if it is a
3145function), @code{gdbarch_@var{X}}.  Note that both accessor functions
3146take a pointer to the @code{@w{struct gdbarch}} as first
3147argument.  Populating the new @code{gdbarch} should use the
3148@code{set_gdbarch} functions.
3149
3150The following sections identify the main elements that should be set
3151in this way.  This is not the complete list, but represents the
3152functions and elements that must commonly be specified for a new
3153architecture.  Many of the functions and variables are described in the
3154header file @file{gdbarch.h}.
3155
3156This is the main work in defining a new architecture.  Implementing the
3157set of functions to populate the @code{struct gdbarch}.
3158
3159@cindex @code{gdbarch_tdep} definition
3160@code{struct gdbarch_tdep} is not defined within @value{GDBN}---it is up
3161to the user to define this struct if it is needed to hold custom target
3162information that is not covered by the standard @code{@w{struct
3163gdbarch}}. For example with the OpenRISC 1000 architecture it is used to
3164hold the number of matchpoints available in the target (along with other
3165information).
3166
3167If there is no additional target specific information, it can be set to
3168@code{NULL}.
3169
3170@node Registers and Memory
3171@section Registers and Memory
3172
3173@value{GDBN}'s model of the target machine is rather simple.
3174@value{GDBN} assumes the machine includes a bank of registers and a
3175block of memory.  Each register may have a different size.
3176
3177@value{GDBN} does not have a magical way to match up with the
3178compiler's idea of which registers are which; however, it is critical
3179that they do match up accurately.  The only way to make this work is
3180to get accurate information about the order that the compiler uses,
3181and to reflect that in the @code{gdbarch_register_name} and related functions.
3182
3183@value{GDBN} can handle big-endian, little-endian, and bi-endian architectures.
3184
3185@node Pointers and Addresses
3186@section Pointers Are Not Always Addresses
3187@cindex pointer representation
3188@cindex address representation
3189@cindex word-addressed machines
3190@cindex separate data and code address spaces
3191@cindex spaces, separate data and code address
3192@cindex address spaces, separate data and code
3193@cindex code pointers, word-addressed
3194@cindex converting between pointers and addresses
3195@cindex D10V addresses
3196
3197On almost all 32-bit architectures, the representation of a pointer is
3198indistinguishable from the representation of some fixed-length number
3199whose value is the byte address of the object pointed to.  On such
3200machines, the words ``pointer'' and ``address'' can be used interchangeably.
3201However, architectures with smaller word sizes are often cramped for
3202address space, so they may choose a pointer representation that breaks this
3203identity, and allows a larger code address space.
3204
3205@c D10V is gone from sources - more current example?
3206
3207For example, the Renesas D10V is a 16-bit VLIW processor whose
3208instructions are 32 bits long@footnote{Some D10V instructions are
3209actually pairs of 16-bit sub-instructions.  However, since you can't
3210jump into the middle of such a pair, code addresses can only refer to
3211full 32 bit instructions, which is what matters in this explanation.}.
3212If the D10V used ordinary byte addresses to refer to code locations,
3213then the processor would only be able to address 64kb of instructions.
3214However, since instructions must be aligned on four-byte boundaries, the
3215low two bits of any valid instruction's byte address are always
3216zero---byte addresses waste two bits.  So instead of byte addresses,
3217the D10V uses word addresses---byte addresses shifted right two bits---to
3218refer to code.  Thus, the D10V can use 16-bit words to address 256kb of
3219code space.
3220
3221However, this means that code pointers and data pointers have different
3222forms on the D10V.  The 16-bit word @code{0xC020} refers to byte address
3223@code{0xC020} when used as a data address, but refers to byte address
3224@code{0x30080} when used as a code address.
3225
3226(The D10V also uses separate code and data address spaces, which also
3227affects the correspondence between pointers and addresses, but we're
3228going to ignore that here; this example is already too long.)
3229
3230To cope with architectures like this---the D10V is not the only
3231one!---@value{GDBN} tries to distinguish between @dfn{addresses}, which are
3232byte numbers, and @dfn{pointers}, which are the target's representation
3233of an address of a particular type of data.  In the example above,
3234@code{0xC020} is the pointer, which refers to one of the addresses
3235@code{0xC020} or @code{0x30080}, depending on the type imposed upon it.
3236@value{GDBN} provides functions for turning a pointer into an address
3237and vice versa, in the appropriate way for the current architecture.
3238
3239Unfortunately, since addresses and pointers are identical on almost all
3240processors, this distinction tends to bit-rot pretty quickly.  Thus,
3241each time you port @value{GDBN} to an architecture which does
3242distinguish between pointers and addresses, you'll probably need to
3243clean up some architecture-independent code.
3244
3245Here are functions which convert between pointers and addresses:
3246
3247@deftypefun CORE_ADDR extract_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type})
3248Treat the bytes at @var{buf} as a pointer or reference of type
3249@var{type}, and return the address it represents, in a manner
3250appropriate for the current architecture.  This yields an address
3251@value{GDBN} can use to read target memory, disassemble, etc.  Note that
3252@var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
3253inferior's.
3254
3255For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
3256extracts a little-endian integer of the appropriate length from
3257@var{buf} and returns it.  However, if the current architecture is the
3258D10V, this function will return a 16-bit integer extracted from
3259@var{buf}, multiplied by four if @var{type} is a pointer to a function.
3260
3261If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
3262will signal an internal error.
3263@end deftypefun
3264
3265@deftypefun CORE_ADDR store_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
3266Store the address @var{addr} in @var{buf}, in the proper format for a
3267pointer of type @var{type} in the current architecture.  Note that
3268@var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
3269inferior's.
3270
3271For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
3272stores @var{addr} unmodified as a little-endian integer of the
3273appropriate length in @var{buf}.  However, if the current architecture
3274is the D10V, this function divides @var{addr} by four if @var{type} is
3275a pointer to a function, and then stores it in @var{buf}.
3276
3277If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
3278will signal an internal error.
3279@end deftypefun
3280
3281@deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_as_address (struct value *@var{val})
3282Assuming that @var{val} is a pointer, return the address it represents,
3283as appropriate for the current architecture.
3284
3285This function actually works on integral values, as well as pointers.
3286For pointers, it performs architecture-specific conversions as
3287described above for @code{extract_typed_address}.
3288@end deftypefun
3289
3290@deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_from_pointer (struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
3291Create and return a value representing a pointer of type @var{type} to
3292the address @var{addr}, as appropriate for the current architecture.
3293This function performs architecture-specific conversions as described
3294above for @code{store_typed_address}.
3295@end deftypefun
3296
3297Here are two functions which architectures can define to indicate the
3298relationship between pointers and addresses.  These have default
3299definitions, appropriate for architectures on which all pointers are
3300simple unsigned byte addresses.
3301
3302@deftypefun CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
3303Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
3304appropriate format for the current architecture.  Return the byte
3305address the pointer refers to.
3306
3307This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
3308C@t{++} reference type.
3309@end deftypefun
3310
3311@deftypefun void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
3312Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
3313@var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
3314
3315This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
3316C@t{++} reference type.
3317@end deftypefun
3318
3319@node Address Classes
3320@section Address Classes
3321@cindex address classes
3322@cindex DW_AT_byte_size
3323@cindex DW_AT_address_class
3324
3325Sometimes information about different kinds of addresses is available
3326via the debug information.  For example, some programming environments
3327define addresses of several different sizes.  If the debug information
3328distinguishes these kinds of address classes through either the size
3329info (e.g, @code{DW_AT_byte_size} in @w{DWARF 2}) or through an explicit
3330address class attribute (e.g, @code{DW_AT_address_class} in @w{DWARF 2}), the
3331following macros should be defined in order to disambiguate these
3332types within @value{GDBN} as well as provide the added information to
3333a @value{GDBN} user when printing type expressions.
3334
3335@deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{byte_size}, int @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
3336Returns the type flags needed to construct a pointer type whose size
3337is @var{byte_size} and whose address class is @var{dwarf2_addr_class}.
3338This function is normally called from within a symbol reader.  See
3339@file{dwarf2read.c}.
3340@end deftypefun
3341
3342@deftypefun {char *} gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{type_flags})
3343Given the type flags representing an address class qualifier, return
3344its name.
3345@end deftypefun
3346@deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{name}, int *@var{type_flags_ptr})
3347Given an address qualifier name, set the @code{int} referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the type flags
3348for that address class qualifier.
3349@end deftypefun
3350
3351Since the need for address classes is rather rare, none of
3352the address class functions are defined by default.  Predicate
3353functions are provided to detect when they are defined.
3354
3355Consider a hypothetical architecture in which addresses are normally
335632-bits wide, but 16-bit addresses are also supported.  Furthermore,
3357suppose that the @w{DWARF 2} information for this architecture simply
3358uses a @code{DW_AT_byte_size} value of 2 to indicate the use of one
3359of these "short" pointers.  The following functions could be defined
3360to implement the address class functions:
3361
3362@smallexample
3363somearch_address_class_type_flags (int byte_size,
3364                                   int dwarf2_addr_class)
3365@{
3366  if (byte_size == 2)
3367    return TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3368  else
3369    return 0;
3370@}
3371
3372static char *
3373somearch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (int type_flags)
3374@{
3375  if (type_flags & TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1)
3376    return "short";
3377  else
3378    return NULL;
3379@}
3380
3381int
3382somearch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (char *name,
3383                                           int *type_flags_ptr)
3384@{
3385  if (strcmp (name, "short") == 0)
3386    @{
3387      *type_flags_ptr = TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3388      return 1;
3389    @}
3390  else
3391    return 0;
3392@}
3393@end smallexample
3394
3395The qualifier @code{@@short} is used in @value{GDBN}'s type expressions
3396to indicate the presence of one of these ``short'' pointers.  For
3397example if the debug information indicates that @code{short_ptr_var} is
3398one of these short pointers, @value{GDBN} might show the following
3399behavior:
3400
3401@smallexample
3402(gdb) ptype short_ptr_var
3403type = int * @@short
3404@end smallexample
3405
3406
3407@node Register Representation
3408@section Register Representation
3409
3410@menu
3411* Raw and Cooked Registers::
3412* Register Architecture Functions & Variables::
3413* Register Information Functions::
3414* Register and Memory Data::
3415* Register Caching::
3416@end menu
3417
3418@node Raw and Cooked Registers
3419@subsection Raw and Cooked Registers
3420@cindex raw register representation
3421@cindex cooked register representation
3422@cindex representations, raw and cooked registers
3423
3424@value{GDBN} considers registers to be a set with members numbered
3425linearly from 0 upwards.  The first part of that set corresponds to real
3426physical registers, the second part to any @dfn{pseudo-registers}.
3427Pseudo-registers have no independent physical existence, but are useful
3428representations of information within the architecture.  For example the
3429OpenRISC 1000 architecture has up to 32 general purpose registers, which
3430are typically represented as 32-bit (or 64-bit) integers.  However the
3431GPRs are also used as operands to the floating point operations, and it
3432could be convenient to define a set of pseudo-registers, to show the
3433GPRs represented as floating point values.
3434
3435For any architecture, the implementer will decide on a mapping from
3436hardware to @value{GDBN} register numbers.  The registers corresponding to real
3437hardware are referred to as @dfn{raw} registers, the remaining registers are
3438@dfn{pseudo-registers}.  The total register set (raw and pseudo) is called
3439the @dfn{cooked} register set.
3440
3441
3442@node Register Architecture Functions & Variables
3443@subsection Functions and Variables Specifying the Register Architecture
3444@cindex @code{gdbarch} register architecture functions
3445
3446These @code{struct gdbarch} functions and variables specify the number
3447and type of registers in the architecture.
3448
3449@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR read_pc (struct regcache *@var{regcache})
3450@end deftypefn
3451@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void write_pc (struct regcache *@var{regcache}, CORE_ADDR @var{val})
3452
3453Read or write the program counter.  The default value of both
3454functions is @code{NULL} (no function available).  If the program
3455counter is just an ordinary register, it can be specified in
3456@code{struct gdbarch} instead (see @code{pc_regnum} below) and it will
3457be read or written using the standard routines to access registers.  This
3458function need only be specified if the program counter is not an
3459ordinary register.
3460
3461Any register information can be obtained using the supplied register
3462cache, @var{regcache}.  @xref{Register Caching, , Register Caching}.
3463
3464@end deftypefn
3465
3466@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void pseudo_register_read (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, int @var{regnum}, const gdb_byte *@var{buf})
3467@end deftypefn
3468@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void pseudo_register_write (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, int @var{regnum}, const gdb_byte *@var{buf})
3469
3470These functions should be defined if there are any pseudo-registers.
3471The default value is @code{NULL}.  @var{regnum} is the number of the
3472register to read or write (which will be a @dfn{cooked} register
3473number) and @var{buf} is the buffer where the value read will be
3474placed, or from which the value to be written will be taken.  The
3475value in the buffer may be converted to or from a signed or unsigned
3476integral value using one of the utility functions (@pxref{Register and
3477Memory Data, , Using Different Register and Memory Data
3478Representations}).
3479
3480The access should be for the specified architecture,
3481@var{gdbarch}.  Any register information can be obtained using the
3482supplied register cache, @var{regcache}.  @xref{Register Caching, ,
3483Register Caching}.
3484
3485@end deftypefn
3486
3487@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int sp_regnum
3488@vindex sp_regnum
3489@cindex stack pointer
3490@cindex @kbd{$sp}
3491
3492This specifies the register holding the stack pointer, which may be a
3493raw or pseudo-register.  It defaults to -1 (not defined), but it is an
3494error for it not to be defined.
3495
3496The value of the stack pointer register can be accessed withing
3497@value{GDBN} as the variable @kbd{$sp}.
3498
3499@end deftypevr
3500
3501@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int pc_regnum
3502@vindex pc_regnum
3503@cindex program counter
3504@cindex @kbd{$pc}
3505
3506This specifies the register holding the program counter, which may be a
3507raw or pseudo-register.  It defaults to -1 (not defined).  If
3508@code{pc_regnum} is not defined, then the functions @code{read_pc} and
3509@code{write_pc} (see above) must be defined.
3510
3511The value of the program counter (whether defined as a register, or
3512through @code{read_pc} and @code{write_pc}) can be accessed withing
3513@value{GDBN} as the variable @kbd{$pc}.
3514
3515@end deftypevr
3516
3517@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int ps_regnum
3518@vindex ps_regnum
3519@cindex processor status register
3520@cindex status register
3521@cindex @kbd{$ps}
3522
3523This specifies the register holding the processor status (often called
3524the status register), which may be a raw or pseudo-register.  It
3525defaults to -1 (not defined).
3526
3527If defined, the value of this register can be accessed withing
3528@value{GDBN} as the variable @kbd{$ps}.
3529
3530@end deftypevr
3531
3532@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int fp0_regnum
3533@vindex fp0_regnum
3534@cindex first floating point register
3535
3536This specifies the first floating point register.  It defaults to
35370.  @code{fp0_regnum} is not needed unless the target offers support
3538for floating point.
3539
3540@end deftypevr
3541
3542@node Register Information Functions
3543@subsection Functions Giving Register Information
3544@cindex @code{gdbarch} register information functions
3545
3546These functions return information about registers.
3547
3548@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {const char *} register_name (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{regnum})
3549
3550This function should convert a register number (raw or pseudo) to a
3551register name (as a C @code{const char *}).  This is used both to
3552determine the name of a register for output and to work out the meaning
3553of any register names used as input.  The function may also return
3554@code{NULL}, to indicate that @var{regnum} is not a valid register.
3555
3556For example with the OpenRISC 1000, @value{GDBN} registers 0-31 are the
3557General Purpose Registers, register 32 is the program counter and
3558register 33 is the supervision register (i.e.@: the processor status
3559register), which map to the strings @code{"gpr00"} through
3560@code{"gpr31"}, @code{"pc"} and @code{"sr"} respectively. This means
3561that the @value{GDBN} command @kbd{print $gpr5} should print the value of
3562the OR1K general purpose register 5@footnote{
3563@cindex frame pointer
3564@cindex @kbd{$fp}
3565Historically, @value{GDBN} always had a concept of a frame pointer
3566register, which could be accessed via the @value{GDBN} variable,
3567@kbd{$fp}.  That concept is now deprecated, recognizing that not all
3568architectures have a frame pointer.  However if an architecture does
3569have a frame pointer register, and defines a register or
3570pseudo-register with the name @code{"fp"}, then that register will be
3571used as the value of the @kbd{$fp} variable.}.
3572
3573The default value for this function is @code{NULL}, meaning
3574undefined. It should always be defined.
3575
3576The access should be for the specified architecture, @var{gdbarch}.
3577
3578@end deftypefn
3579
3580@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct type *} register_type (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{regnum})
3581
3582Given a register number, this function identifies the type of data it
3583may be holding, specified as a @code{struct type}.  @value{GDBN} allows
3584creation of arbitrary types, but a number of built in types are
3585provided (@code{builtin_type_void}, @code{builtin_type_int32} etc),
3586together with functions to derive types from these.
3587
3588Typically the program counter will have a type of ``pointer to
3589function'' (it points to code), the frame pointer and stack pointer
3590will have types of ``pointer to void'' (they point to data on the stack)
3591and all other integer registers will have a type of 32-bit integer or
359264-bit integer.
3593
3594This information guides the formatting when displaying register
3595information.  The default value is @code{NULL} meaning no information is
3596available to guide formatting when displaying registers.
3597
3598@end deftypefn
3599
3600@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void print_registers_info (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct ui_file *@var{file}, struct frame_info *@var{frame}, int @var{regnum}, int @var{all})
3601
3602Define this function to print out one or all of the registers for the
3603@value{GDBN} @kbd{info registers} command.  The default value is the
3604function @code{default_print_registers_info}, which uses the register
3605type information (see @code{register_type} above) to determine how each
3606register should be printed.  Define a custom version of this function
3607for fuller control over how the registers are displayed.
3608
3609The access should be for the specified architecture, @var{gdbarch},
3610with output to the the file specified by the User Interface
3611Independent Output file handle, @var{file} (@pxref{UI-Independent
3612Output, , UI-Independent Output---the @code{ui_out}
3613Functions}).
3614
3615The registers should show their values in the frame specified by
3616@var{frame}.  If @var{regnum} is -1 and @var{all} is zero, then all
3617the ``significant'' registers should be shown (the implementer should
3618decide which registers are ``significant''). Otherwise only the value of
3619the register specified by @var{regnum} should be output.  If
3620@var{regnum} is -1 and @var{all} is non-zero (true), then the value of
3621all registers should be shown.
3622
3623By default @code{default_print_registers_info} prints one register per
3624line, and if @var{all} is zero omits floating-point registers.
3625
3626@end deftypefn
3627
3628@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void print_float_info (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct ui_file *@var{file}, struct frame_info *@var{frame}, const char *@var{args})
3629
3630Define this function to provide output about the floating point unit and
3631registers for the @value{GDBN} @kbd{info float} command respectively.
3632The default value is @code{NULL} (not defined), meaning no information
3633will be provided.
3634
3635The @var{gdbarch} and @var{file} and @var{frame} arguments have the same
3636meaning as in the @code{print_registers_info} function above. The string
3637@var{args} contains any supplementary arguments to the @kbd{info float}
3638command.
3639
3640Define this function if the target supports floating point operations.
3641
3642@end deftypefn
3643
3644@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void print_vector_info (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct ui_file *@var{file}, struct frame_info *@var{frame}, const char *@var{args})
3645
3646Define this function to provide output about the vector unit and
3647registers for the @value{GDBN} @kbd{info vector} command respectively.
3648The default value is @code{NULL} (not defined), meaning no information
3649will be provided.
3650
3651The @var{gdbarch}, @var{file} and @var{frame} arguments have the
3652same meaning as in the @code{print_registers_info} function above.  The
3653string @var{args} contains any supplementary arguments to the @kbd{info
3654vector} command.
3655
3656Define this function if the target supports vector operations.
3657
3658@end deftypefn
3659
3660@deftypefn {Architecture Function} int register_reggroup_p (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{regnum}, struct reggroup *@var{group})
3661
3662@value{GDBN} groups registers into different categories (general,
3663vector, floating point etc).  This function, given a register,
3664@var{regnum}, and group, @var{group}, returns 1 (true) if the register
3665is in the group and 0 (false) otherwise.
3666
3667The information should be for the specified architecture,
3668@var{gdbarch}
3669
3670The default value is the function @code{default_register_reggroup_p}
3671which will do a reasonable job based on the type of the register (see
3672the function @code{register_type} above), with groups for general
3673purpose registers, floating point registers, vector registers and raw
3674(i.e not pseudo) registers.
3675
3676@end deftypefn
3677
3678@node Register and Memory Data
3679@subsection Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations
3680@cindex register representation
3681@cindex memory representation
3682@cindex representations, register and memory
3683@cindex register data formats, converting
3684@cindex @code{struct value}, converting register contents to
3685
3686Some architectures have different representations of data objects,
3687depending whether the object is held in a register or memory.  For
3688example:
3689
3690@itemize @bullet
3691
3692@item
3693The Alpha architecture can represent 32 bit integer values in
3694floating-point registers.
3695
3696@item
3697The x86 architecture supports 80-bit floating-point registers.  The
3698@code{long double} data type occupies 96 bits in memory but only 80
3699bits when stored in a register.
3700
3701@end itemize
3702
3703In general, the register representation of a data type is determined by
3704the architecture, or @value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while
3705the memory representation is determined by the Application Binary
3706Interface.
3707
3708For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the two
3709representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3710However, they do occasionally differ.  An architecture may define the
3711following @code{struct gdbarch} functions to request conversions
3712between the register and memory representations of a data type:
3713
3714@deftypefn {Architecture Function} int gdbarch_convert_register_p (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg})
3715
3716Return non-zero (true) if the representation of a data value stored in
3717this register may be different to the representation of that same data
3718value when stored in memory.  The default value is @code{NULL}
3719(undefined).
3720
3721If this function is defined and returns non-zero, the @code{struct
3722gdbarch} functions @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3723@code{gdbarch_value_to_register} (see below) should be used to perform
3724any necessary conversion.
3725
3726If defined, this function should return zero for the register's native
3727type, when no conversion is necessary.
3728@end deftypefn
3729
3730@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void gdbarch_register_to_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3731
3732Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to a data object of
3733type @var{type}.  The buffer at @var{from} holds the register's value
3734in raw format; the converted value should be placed in the buffer at
3735@var{to}.
3736
3737@quotation
3738@emph{Note:} @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3739@code{gdbarch_value_to_register} take their @var{reg} and @var{type}
3740arguments in different orders.
3741@end quotation
3742
3743@code{gdbarch_register_to_value} should only be used with registers
3744for which the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a
3745non-zero value.
3746
3747@end deftypefn
3748
3749@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void gdbarch_value_to_register (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3750
3751Convert a data value of type @var{type} to register number @var{reg}'
3752raw format.
3753
3754@quotation
3755@emph{Note:} @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3756@code{gdbarch_value_to_register} take their @var{reg} and @var{type}
3757arguments in different orders.
3758@end quotation
3759
3760@code{gdbarch_value_to_register} should only be used with registers
3761for which the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a
3762non-zero value.
3763
3764@end deftypefn
3765
3766@node Register Caching
3767@subsection Register Caching
3768@cindex register caching
3769
3770Caching of registers is used, so that the target does not need to be
3771accessed and reanalyzed multiple times for each register in
3772circumstances where the register value cannot have changed.
3773
3774@cindex @code{struct regcache}
3775@value{GDBN} provides @code{struct regcache}, associated with a
3776particular @code{struct gdbarch} to hold the cached values of the raw
3777registers.  A set of functions is provided to access both the raw
3778registers (with @code{raw} in their name) and the full set of cooked
3779registers (with @code{cooked} in their name).  Functions are provided
3780to ensure the register cache is kept synchronized with the values of
3781the actual registers in the target.
3782
3783Accessing registers through the @code{struct regcache} routines will
3784ensure that the appropriate @code{struct gdbarch} functions are called
3785when necessary to access the underlying target architecture.  In general
3786users should use the @dfn{cooked} functions, since these will map to the
3787@dfn{raw} functions automatically as appropriate.
3788
3789@findex regcache_cooked_read
3790@findex regcache_cooked_write
3791@cindex @code{gdb_byte}
3792@findex regcache_cooked_read_signed
3793@findex regcache_cooked_read_unsigned
3794@findex regcache_cooked_write_signed
3795@findex regcache_cooked_write_unsigned
3796The two key functions are @code{regcache_cooked_read} and
3797@code{regcache_cooked_write} which read or write a register from or to
3798a byte buffer (type @code{gdb_byte *}).  For convenience the wrapper
3799functions @code{regcache_cooked_read_signed},
3800@code{regcache_cooked_read_unsigned},
3801@code{regcache_cooked_write_signed} and
3802@code{regcache_cooked_write_unsigned} are provided, which read or
3803write the value using the buffer and convert to or from an integral
3804value as appropriate.
3805
3806@node Frame Interpretation
3807@section Frame Interpretation
3808
3809@menu
3810* All About Stack Frames::
3811* Frame Handling Terminology::
3812* Prologue Caches::
3813* Functions and Variable to Analyze Frames::
3814* Functions to Access Frame Data::
3815* Analyzing Stacks---Frame Sniffers::
3816@end menu
3817
3818@node All About Stack Frames
3819@subsection All About Stack Frames
3820
3821@value{GDBN} needs to understand the stack on which local (automatic)
3822variables are stored.  The area of the stack containing all the local
3823variables for a function invocation is known as the @dfn{stack frame}
3824for that function (or colloquially just as the @dfn{frame}).  In turn the
3825function that called the function will have its stack frame, and so on
3826back through the chain of functions that have been called.
3827
3828Almost all architectures have one register dedicated to point to the
3829end of the stack (the @dfn{stack pointer}).  Many have a second register
3830which points to the start of the currently active stack frame (the
3831@dfn{frame pointer}).  The specific arrangements for an architecture are
3832a key part of the ABI.
3833
3834A diagram helps to explain this.  Here is a simple program to compute
3835factorials:
3836
3837@smallexample
3838#include <stdio.h>
3839int fact (int n)
3840@{
3841  if (0 == n)
3842    @{
3843      return 1;
3844    @}
3845  else
3846    @{
3847      return n * fact (n - 1);
3848    @}
3849@}
3850
3851main ()
3852@{
3853  int i;
3854
3855  for (i = 0; i < 10; i++)
3856    @{
3857      int   f = fact (i);
3858      printf ("%d! = %d\n", i, f);
3859    @}
3860@}
3861@end smallexample
3862
3863Consider the state of the stack when the code reaches line 6 after the
3864main program has called @code{fact@w{ }(3)}.  The chain of function
3865calls will be @code{main ()}, @code{fact@w{ }(3)}, @code{fact@w{
3866}(2)}, @code{@w{fact (1)}} and @code{fact@w{ }(0)}.
3867
3868In this illustration the stack is falling (as used for example by the
3869OpenRISC 1000 ABI).  The stack pointer (SP) is at the end of the stack
3870(lowest address) and the frame pointer (FP) is at the highest address
3871in the current stack frame.  The following diagram shows how the stack
3872looks.
3873
3874@center @image{stack_frame,14cm}
3875
3876In each stack frame, offset 0 from the stack pointer is the frame
3877pointer of the previous frame and offset 4 (this is illustrating a
387832-bit architecture) from the stack pointer is the return address.
3879Local variables are indexed from the frame pointer, with negative
3880indexes.  In the function @code{fact}, offset -4 from the frame
3881pointer is the argument @var{n}.  In the @code{main} function, offset
3882-4 from the frame pointer is the local variable @var{i} and offset -8
3883from the frame pointer is the local variable @var{f}@footnote{This is
3884a simplified example for illustrative purposes only.  Good optimizing
3885compilers would not put anything on the stack for such simple
3886functions.  Indeed they might eliminate the recursion and use of the
3887stack entirely!}.
3888
3889It is very easy to get confused when examining stacks.  @value{GDBN}
3890has terminology it uses rigorously throughout.  The stack frame of the
3891function currently executing, or where execution stopped is numbered
3892zero.  In this example frame #0 is the stack frame of the call to
3893@code{fact@w{ }(0)}.  The stack frame of its calling function
3894(@code{fact@w{ }(1)} in this case) is numbered #1 and so on back
3895through the chain of calls.
3896
3897The main @value{GDBN} data structure describing frames is
3898 @code{@w{struct frame_info}}.  It is not used directly, but only via
3899its accessor functions.  @code{frame_info} includes information about
3900the registers in the frame and a pointer to the code of the function
3901with which the frame is associated.  The entire stack is represented as
3902a linked list of @code{frame_info} structs.
3903
3904@node Frame Handling Terminology
3905@subsection Frame Handling Terminology
3906
3907It is easy to get confused when referencing stack frames.  @value{GDBN}
3908uses some precise terminology.
3909
3910@itemize @bullet
3911
3912@item
3913@cindex THIS frame
3914@cindex stack frame, definition of THIS frame
3915@cindex frame, definition of THIS frame
3916@dfn{THIS} frame is the frame currently under consideration.
3917
3918@item
3919@cindex NEXT frame
3920@cindex stack frame, definition of NEXT frame
3921@cindex frame, definition of NEXT frame
3922The @dfn{NEXT} frame, also sometimes called the inner or newer frame is the
3923frame of the function called by the function of THIS frame.
3924
3925@item
3926@cindex PREVIOUS frame
3927@cindex stack frame, definition of PREVIOUS frame
3928@cindex frame, definition of PREVIOUS frame
3929The @dfn{PREVIOUS} frame, also sometimes called the outer or older frame is
3930the frame of the function which called the function of THIS frame.
3931
3932@end itemize
3933
3934So in the example in the previous section (@pxref{All About Stack
3935Frames, , All About Stack Frames}), if THIS frame is #3 (the call to
3936@code{fact@w{ }(3)}), the NEXT frame is frame #2 (the call to
3937@code{fact@w{ }(2)}) and the PREVIOUS frame is frame #4 (the call to
3938@code{main@w{ }()}).
3939
3940@cindex innermost frame
3941@cindex stack frame, definition of innermost frame
3942@cindex frame, definition of innermost frame
3943The @dfn{innermost} frame is the frame of the current executing
3944function, or where the program stopped, in this example, in the middle
3945of the call to @code{@w{fact (0))}}.  It is always numbered frame #0.
3946
3947@cindex base of a frame
3948@cindex stack frame, definition of base of a frame
3949@cindex frame, definition of base of a frame
3950The @dfn{base} of a frame is the address immediately before the start
3951of the NEXT frame.  For a stack which grows down in memory (a
3952@dfn{falling} stack) this will be the lowest address and for a stack
3953which grows up in memory (a @dfn{rising} stack) this will be the
3954highest address in the frame.
3955
3956@value{GDBN} functions to analyze the stack are typically given a
3957pointer to the NEXT frame to determine information about THIS
3958frame.  Information about THIS frame includes data on where the
3959registers of the PREVIOUS frame are stored in this stack frame.  In
3960this example the frame pointer of the PREVIOUS frame is stored at
3961offset 0 from the stack pointer of THIS frame.
3962
3963@cindex unwinding
3964@cindex stack frame, definition of unwinding
3965@cindex frame, definition of unwinding
3966The process whereby a function is given a pointer to the NEXT
3967frame to work out information about THIS frame is referred to as
3968@dfn{unwinding}.  The @value{GDBN} functions involved in this typically
3969include unwind in their name.
3970
3971@cindex sniffing
3972@cindex stack frame, definition of sniffing
3973@cindex frame, definition of sniffing
3974The process of analyzing a target to determine the information that
3975should go in struct frame_info is called @dfn{sniffing}.  The functions
3976that carry this out are called sniffers and typically include sniffer
3977in their name.  More than one sniffer may be required to extract all
3978the information for a particular frame.
3979
3980@cindex sentinel frame
3981@cindex stack frame, definition of sentinel frame
3982@cindex frame, definition of sentinel frame
3983Because so many functions work using the NEXT frame, there is an issue
3984about addressing the innermost frame---it has no NEXT frame.  To solve
3985this @value{GDBN} creates a dummy frame #-1, known as the
3986@dfn{sentinel} frame.
3987
3988@node Prologue Caches
3989@subsection Prologue Caches
3990
3991@cindex function prologue
3992@cindex prologue of a function
3993All the frame sniffing functions typically examine the code at the
3994start of the corresponding function, to determine the state of
3995registers.  The ABI will save old values and set new values of key
3996registers at the start of each function in what is known as the
3997function @dfn{prologue}.
3998
3999@cindex prologue cache
4000For any particular stack frame this data does not change, so all the
4001standard unwinding functions, in addition to receiving a pointer to
4002the NEXT frame as their first argument, receive a pointer to a
4003@dfn{prologue cache} as their second argument.  This can be used to store
4004values associated with a particular frame, for reuse on subsequent
4005calls involving the same frame.
4006
4007It is up to the user to define the structure used (it is a
4008@code{void@w{ }*} pointer) and arrange allocation and deallocation of
4009storage.  However for general use, @value{GDBN} provides
4010@code{@w{struct trad_frame_cache}}, with a set of accessor
4011routines.  This structure holds the stack and code address of
4012THIS frame, the base address of the frame, a pointer to the
4013struct @code{frame_info} for the NEXT frame and details of
4014where the registers of the PREVIOUS frame may be found in THIS
4015frame.
4016
4017Typically the first time any sniffer function is called with NEXT
4018frame, the prologue sniffer for THIS frame will be @code{NULL}.  The
4019sniffer will analyze the frame, allocate a prologue cache structure
4020and populate it.  Subsequent calls using the same NEXT frame will
4021pass in this prologue cache, so the data can be returned with no
4022additional analysis.
4023
4024@node Functions and Variable to Analyze Frames
4025@subsection Functions and Variable to Analyze Frames
4026
4027These struct @code{gdbarch} functions and variable should be defined
4028to provide analysis of the stack frame and allow it to be adjusted as
4029required.
4030
4031@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR skip_prologue (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{pc})
4032
4033The prologue of a function is the code at the beginning of the
4034function which sets up the stack frame, saves the return address
4035etc.  The code representing the behavior of the function starts after
4036the prologue.
4037
4038This function skips past the prologue of a function if the program
4039counter, @var{pc}, is within the prologue of a function.  The result is
4040the program counter immediately after the prologue.  With modern
4041optimizing compilers, this may be a far from trivial exercise.  However
4042the required information may be within the binary as DWARF2 debugging
4043information, making the job much easier.
4044
4045The default value is @code{NULL} (not defined).  This function should always
4046be provided, but can take advantage of DWARF2 debugging information,
4047if that is available.
4048
4049@end deftypefn
4050
4051@deftypefn {Architecture Function} int inner_than (CORE_ADDR @var{lhs}, CORE_ADDR @var{rhs})
4052@findex core_addr_lessthan
4053@findex core_addr_greaterthan
4054
4055Given two frame or stack pointers, return non-zero (true) if the first
4056represents the @dfn{inner} stack frame and 0 (false) otherwise.  This
4057is used to determine whether the target has a stack which grows up in
4058memory (rising stack) or grows down in memory (falling stack).
4059@xref{All About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames}, for an
4060explanation of @dfn{inner} frames.
4061
4062The default value of this function is @code{NULL} and it should always
4063be defined.  However for almost all architectures one of the built-in
4064functions can be used: @code{core_addr_lessthan} (for stacks growing
4065down in memory) or @code{core_addr_greaterthan} (for stacks growing up
4066in memory).
4067
4068@end deftypefn
4069
4070@anchor{frame_align}
4071@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR frame_align (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{address})
4072@findex align_down
4073@findex align_up
4074
4075The architecture may have constraints on how its frames are
4076aligned.  For example the OpenRISC 1000 ABI requires stack frames to be
4077double-word aligned, but 32-bit versions of the architecture allocate
4078single-word values to the stack.  Thus extra padding may be needed at
4079the end of a stack frame.
4080
4081Given a proposed address for the stack pointer, this function
4082returns a suitably aligned address (by expanding the stack frame).
4083
4084The default value is @code{NULL} (undefined).  This function should be defined
4085for any architecture where it is possible the stack could become
4086misaligned.  The utility functions @code{align_down} (for falling
4087stacks) and @code{align_up} (for rising stacks) will facilitate the
4088implementation of this function.
4089
4090@end deftypefn
4091
4092@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int frame_red_zone_size
4093
4094Some ABIs reserve space beyond the end of the stack for use by leaf
4095functions without prologue or epilogue or by exception handlers (for
4096example the OpenRISC 1000).
4097
4098This is known as a @dfn{red zone} (AMD terminology).  The @sc{amd64}
4099(nee x86-64) ABI documentation refers to the @dfn{red zone} when
4100describing this scratch area.
4101
4102The default value is 0.  Set this field if the architecture has such a
4103red zone.  The value must be aligned as required by the ABI (see
4104@code{frame_align} above for an explanation of stack frame alignment).
4105
4106@end deftypevr
4107
4108@node Functions to Access Frame Data
4109@subsection Functions to Access Frame Data
4110
4111These functions provide access to key registers and arguments in the
4112stack frame.
4113
4114@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR unwind_pc (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{next_frame})
4115
4116This function is given a pointer to the NEXT stack frame (@pxref{All
4117About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames}, for how frames are
4118represented) and returns the value of the program counter in the
4119PREVIOUS frame (i.e.@: the frame of the function that called THIS
4120one).  This is commonly referred to as the @dfn{return address}.
4121
4122The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
4123is typically no more than:
4124
4125@smallexample
4126ULONGEST pc;
4127pc = frame_unwind_register_unsigned (next_frame, @var{ARCH}_PC_REGNUM);
4128return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, pc);
4129@end smallexample
4130
4131@end deftypefn
4132
4133@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR unwind_sp (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{next_frame})
4134
4135This function is given a pointer to the NEXT stack frame
4136(@pxref{All About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames} for how
4137frames are represented) and returns the value of the stack pointer in
4138the PREVIOUS frame (i.e.@: the frame of the function that called
4139THIS one).
4140
4141The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
4142is typically no more than:
4143
4144@smallexample
4145ULONGEST sp;
4146sp = frame_unwind_register_unsigned (next_frame, @var{ARCH}_SP_REGNUM);
4147return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, sp);
4148@end smallexample
4149
4150@end deftypefn
4151
4152@deftypefn {Architecture Function} int frame_num_args (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{this_frame})
4153
4154This function is given a pointer to THIS stack frame (@pxref{All
4155About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames} for how frames are
4156represented), and returns the number of arguments that are being
4157passed, or -1 if not known.
4158
4159The default value is @code{NULL} (undefined), in which case the number of
4160arguments passed on any stack frame is always unknown.  For many
4161architectures this will be a suitable default.
4162
4163@end deftypefn
4164
4165@node Analyzing Stacks---Frame Sniffers
4166@subsection Analyzing Stacks---Frame Sniffers
4167
4168When a program stops, @value{GDBN} needs to construct the chain of
4169struct @code{frame_info} representing the state of the stack using
4170appropriate @dfn{sniffers}.
4171
4172Each architecture requires appropriate sniffers, but they do not form
4173entries in @code{@w{struct gdbarch}}, since more than one sniffer may
4174be required and a sniffer may be suitable for more than one
4175@code{@w{struct gdbarch}}.  Instead sniffers are associated with
4176architectures using the following functions.
4177
4178@itemize @bullet
4179
4180@item
4181@findex frame_unwind_append_sniffer
4182@code{frame_unwind_append_sniffer} is used to add a new sniffer to
4183analyze THIS frame when given a pointer to the NEXT frame.
4184
4185@item
4186@findex frame_base_append_sniffer
4187@code{frame_base_append_sniffer} is used to add a new sniffer
4188which can determine information about the base of a stack frame.
4189
4190@item
4191@findex frame_base_set_default
4192@code{frame_base_set_default} is used to specify the default base
4193sniffer.
4194
4195@end itemize
4196
4197These functions all take a reference to @code{@w{struct gdbarch}}, so
4198they are associated with a specific architecture.  They are usually
4199called in the @code{gdbarch} initialization function, after the
4200@code{gdbarch} struct has been set up.  Unless a default has been set, the
4201most recently appended sniffer will be tried first.
4202
4203The main frame unwinding sniffer (as set by
4204@code{frame_unwind_append_sniffer)} returns a structure specifying
4205a set of sniffing functions:
4206
4207@cindex @code{frame_unwind}
4208@smallexample
4209struct frame_unwind
4210@{
4211   enum frame_type            type;
4212   frame_this_id_ftype       *this_id;
4213   frame_prev_register_ftype *prev_register;
4214   const struct frame_data   *unwind_data;
4215   frame_sniffer_ftype       *sniffer;
4216   frame_prev_pc_ftype       *prev_pc;
4217   frame_dealloc_cache_ftype *dealloc_cache;
4218@};
4219@end smallexample
4220
4221The @code{type} field indicates the type of frame this sniffer can
4222handle: normal, dummy (@pxref{Functions Creating Dummy Frames, ,
4223Functions Creating Dummy Frames}), signal handler or sentinel.  Signal
4224handlers sometimes have their own simplified stack structure for
4225efficiency, so may need their own handlers.
4226
4227The @code{unwind_data} field holds additional information which may be
4228relevant to particular types of frame.  For example it may hold
4229additional information for signal handler frames.
4230
4231The remaining fields define functions that yield different types of
4232information when given a pointer to the NEXT stack frame.  Not all
4233functions need be provided.  If an entry is @code{NULL}, the next sniffer will
4234be tried instead.
4235
4236@itemize @bullet
4237
4238@item
4239@code{this_id} determines the stack pointer and function (code
4240entry point) for THIS stack frame.
4241
4242@item
4243@code{prev_register} determines where the values of registers for
4244the PREVIOUS stack frame are stored in THIS stack frame.
4245
4246@item
4247@code{sniffer} takes a look at THIS frame's registers to
4248determine if this is the appropriate unwinder.
4249
4250@item
4251@code{prev_pc} determines the program counter for THIS
4252frame.  Only needed if the program counter is not an ordinary register
4253(@pxref{Register Architecture Functions & Variables,
4254, Functions and Variables Specifying the Register Architecture}).
4255
4256@item
4257@code{dealloc_cache} frees any additional memory associated with
4258the prologue cache for this frame (@pxref{Prologue Caches, , Prologue
4259Caches}).
4260
4261@end itemize
4262
4263In general it is only the @code{this_id} and @code{prev_register}
4264fields that need be defined for custom sniffers.
4265
4266The frame base sniffer is much simpler.  It is a @code{@w{struct
4267frame_base}}, which refers to the corresponding @code{frame_unwind}
4268struct and whose fields refer to functions yielding various addresses
4269within the frame.
4270
4271@cindex @code{frame_base}
4272@smallexample
4273struct frame_base
4274@{
4275   const struct frame_unwind *unwind;
4276   frame_this_base_ftype     *this_base;
4277   frame_this_locals_ftype   *this_locals;
4278   frame_this_args_ftype     *this_args;
4279@};
4280@end smallexample
4281
4282All the functions referred to take a pointer to the NEXT frame as
4283argument. The function referred to by @code{this_base} returns the
4284base address of THIS frame, the function referred to by
4285@code{this_locals} returns the base address of local variables in THIS
4286frame and the function referred to by @code{this_args} returns the
4287base address of the function arguments in this frame.
4288
4289As described above, the base address of a frame is the address
4290immediately before the start of the NEXT frame.  For a falling
4291stack, this is the lowest address in the frame and for a rising stack
4292it is the highest address in the frame.  For most architectures the
4293same address is also the base address for local variables and
4294arguments, in which case the same function can be used for all three
4295entries@footnote{It is worth noting that if it cannot be determined in any
4296other way (for example by there being a register with the name
4297@code{"fp"}), then the result of the @code{this_base} function will be
4298used as the value of the frame pointer variable @kbd{$fp} in
4299@value{GDBN}.  This is very often not correct (for example with the
4300OpenRISC 1000, this value is the stack pointer, @kbd{$sp}).  In this
4301case a register (raw or pseudo) with the name @code{"fp"} should be
4302defined.  It will be used in preference as the value of @kbd{$fp}.}.
4303
4304@node Inferior Call Setup
4305@section Inferior Call Setup
4306@cindex calls to the inferior
4307
4308@menu
4309* About Dummy Frames::
4310* Functions Creating Dummy Frames::
4311@end menu
4312
4313@node About Dummy Frames
4314@subsection About Dummy Frames
4315@cindex dummy frames
4316
4317@value{GDBN} can call functions in the target code (for example by
4318using the @kbd{call} or @kbd{print} commands).  These functions may be
4319breakpointed, and it is essential that if a function does hit a
4320breakpoint, commands like @kbd{backtrace} work correctly.
4321
4322This is achieved by making the stack look as though the function had
4323been called from the point where @value{GDBN} had previously stopped.
4324This requires that @value{GDBN} can set up stack frames appropriate for
4325such function calls.
4326
4327@node Functions Creating Dummy Frames
4328@subsection Functions Creating Dummy Frames
4329
4330The following functions provide the functionality to set up such
4331@dfn{dummy} stack frames.
4332
4333@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR push_dummy_call (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct value *@var{function}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, CORE_ADDR @var{bp_addr}, int  @var{nargs}, struct value **@var{args}, CORE_ADDR @var{sp}, int  @var{struct_return}, CORE_ADDR @var{struct_addr})
4334
4335This function sets up a dummy stack frame for the function about to be
4336called.  @code{push_dummy_call} is given the arguments to be passed
4337and must copy them into registers or push them on to the stack as
4338appropriate for the ABI.
4339
4340@var{function} is a pointer to the function
4341that will be called and @var{regcache} the register cache from which
4342values should be obtained.  @var{bp_addr} is the address to which the
4343function should return (which is breakpointed, so @value{GDBN} can
4344regain control, hence the name).  @var{nargs} is the number of
4345arguments to pass and @var{args} an array containing the argument
4346values.  @var{struct_return} is non-zero (true) if the function returns
4347a structure, and if so @var{struct_addr} is the address in which the
4348structure should be returned.
4349
4350 After calling this function, @value{GDBN} will pass control to the
4351target at the address of the function, which will find the stack and
4352registers set up just as expected.
4353
4354The default value of this function is @code{NULL} (undefined).  If the
4355function is not defined, then @value{GDBN} will not allow the user to
4356call functions within the target being debugged.
4357
4358@end deftypefn
4359
4360@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct frame_id} unwind_dummy_id (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{next_frame})
4361
4362This is the inverse of @code{push_dummy_call} which restores the stack
4363pointer and program counter after a call to evaluate a function using
4364a dummy stack frame.  The result is a @code{@w{struct frame_id}}, which
4365contains the value of the stack pointer and program counter to be
4366used.
4367
4368The NEXT frame pointer is provided as argument,
4369@var{next_frame}.  THIS frame is the frame of the dummy function,
4370which can be unwound, to yield the required stack pointer and program
4371counter from the PREVIOUS frame.
4372
4373The default value is @code{NULL} (undefined).  If @code{push_dummy_call} is
4374defined, then this function should also be defined.
4375
4376@end deftypefn
4377
4378@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR push_dummy_code (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{sp}, CORE_ADDR @var{funaddr}, struct value **@var{args}, int  @var{nargs}, struct type *@var{value_type}, CORE_ADDR *@var{real_pc}, CORE_ADDR *@var{bp_addr}, struct regcache *@var{regcache})
4379
4380If this function is not defined (its default value is @code{NULL}), a dummy
4381call will use the entry point of the currently loaded code on the
4382target as its return address.  A temporary breakpoint will be set
4383there, so the location must be writable and have room for a
4384breakpoint.
4385
4386It is possible that this default is not suitable.  It might not be
4387writable (in ROM possibly), or the ABI might require code to be
4388executed on return from a call to unwind the stack before the
4389breakpoint is encountered.
4390
4391If either of these is the case, then push_dummy_code should be defined
4392to push an instruction sequence onto the end of the stack to which the
4393dummy call should return.
4394
4395The arguments are essentially the same as those to
4396@code{push_dummy_call}.  However the function is provided with the
4397type of the function result, @var{value_type}, @var{bp_addr} is used
4398to return a value (the address at which the breakpoint instruction
4399should be inserted) and @var{real pc} is used to specify the resume
4400address when starting the call sequence.  The function should return
4401the updated innermost stack address.
4402
4403@quotation
4404@emph{Note:} This does require that code in the stack can be executed.
4405Some Harvard architectures may not allow this.
4406@end quotation
4407
4408@end deftypefn
4409
4410@node Adding support for debugging core files
4411@section Adding support for debugging core files
4412@cindex core files
4413
4414The prerequisite for adding core file support in @value{GDBN} is to have
4415core file support in BFD.
4416
4417Once BFD support is available, writing the apropriate
4418@code{regset_from_core_section} architecture function should be all
4419that is needed in order to add support for core files in @value{GDBN}.
4420
4421@node Defining Other Architecture Features
4422@section Defining Other Architecture Features
4423
4424This section describes other functions and values in @code{gdbarch},
4425together with some useful macros, that you can use to define the
4426target architecture.
4427
4428@table @code
4429
4430@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
4431@findex gdbarch_addr_bits_remove
4432If a raw machine instruction address includes any bits that are not
4433really part of the address, then this function is used to zero those bits in
4434@var{addr}.  This is only used for addresses of instructions, and even then not
4435in all contexts.
4436
4437For example, the two low-order bits of the PC on the Hewlett-Packard PA
44382.0 architecture contain the privilege level of the corresponding
4439instruction.  Since instructions must always be aligned on four-byte
4440boundaries, the processor masks out these bits to generate the actual
4441address of the instruction.  @code{gdbarch_addr_bits_remove} would then for
4442example look like that:
4443@smallexample
4444arch_addr_bits_remove (CORE_ADDR addr)
4445@{
4446  return (addr &= ~0x3);
4447@}
4448@end smallexample
4449
4450@item int address_class_name_to_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{name}, @var{type_flags_ptr})
4451@findex address_class_name_to_type_flags
4452If @var{name} is a valid address class qualifier name, set the @code{int}
4453referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the mask representing the qualifier
4454and return 1.  If @var{name} is not a valid address class qualifier name,
4455return 0.
4456
4457The value for @var{type_flags_ptr} should be one of
4458@code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1}, @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or
4459possibly some combination of these values or'd together.
4460@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
4461
4462@item int address_class_name_to_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
4463@findex address_class_name_to_type_flags_p
4464Predicate which indicates whether @code{address_class_name_to_type_flags}
4465has been defined.
4466
4467@item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{byte_size}, @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
4468@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags
4469Given a pointers byte size (as described by the debug information) and
4470the possible @code{DW_AT_address_class} value, return the type flags
4471used by @value{GDBN} to represent this address class.  The value
4472returned should be one of @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1},
4473@code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or possibly some combination of these
4474values or'd together.
4475@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
4476
4477@item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
4478@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p
4479Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p} has
4480been defined.
4481
4482@item const char *gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type_flags})
4483@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name
4484Return the name of the address class qualifier associated with the type
4485flags given by @var{type_flags}.
4486
4487@item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p (@var{gdbarch})
4488@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p
4489Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name} has been defined.
4490@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
4491
4492@item void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf}, @var{addr})
4493@findex gdbarch_address_to_pointer
4494Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
4495@var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
4496This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
4497C@t{++} reference type.
4498@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
4499
4500@item int gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion (@var{gdbarch})
4501@findex gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion
4502Used to notify if the compiler promotes a @code{short} or @code{char}
4503parameter to an @code{int}, but still reports the parameter as its
4504original type, rather than the promoted type.
4505
4506@item gdbarch_bits_big_endian (@var{gdbarch})
4507@findex gdbarch_bits_big_endian
4508This is used if the numbering of bits in the targets does @strong{not} match
4509the endianism of the target byte order.  A value of 1 means that the bits
4510are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 means little-endian.
4511
4512@item set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bits_big_endian})
4513@findex set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian
4514Calling set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian with a value of 1 indicates that the
4515bits in the target are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 indicates
4516little-endian.
4517
4518@item BREAKPOINT
4519@findex BREAKPOINT
4520This is the character array initializer for the bit pattern to put into
4521memory where a breakpoint is set.  Although it's common to use a trap
4522instruction for a breakpoint, it's not required; for instance, the bit
4523pattern could be an invalid instruction.  The breakpoint must be no
4524longer than the shortest instruction of the architecture.
4525
4526@code{BREAKPOINT} has been deprecated in favor of
4527@code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
4528
4529@item BIG_BREAKPOINT
4530@itemx LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
4531@findex LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
4532@findex BIG_BREAKPOINT
4533Similar to BREAKPOINT, but used for bi-endian targets.
4534
4535@code{BIG_BREAKPOINT} and @code{LITTLE_BREAKPOINT} have been deprecated in
4536favor of @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
4537
4538@item const gdb_byte *gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pcptr}, @var{lenptr})
4539@findex gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc
4540@anchor{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} Use the program counter to determine the
4541contents and size of a breakpoint instruction.  It returns a pointer to
4542a static string of bytes that encode a breakpoint instruction, stores the
4543length of the string to @code{*@var{lenptr}}, and adjusts the program
4544counter (if necessary) to point to the actual memory location where the
4545breakpoint should be inserted.  May return @code{NULL} to indicate that
4546software breakpoints are not supported.
4547
4548Although it is common to use a trap instruction for a breakpoint, it's
4549not required; for instance, the bit pattern could be an invalid
4550instruction.  The breakpoint must be no longer than the shortest
4551instruction of the architecture.
4552
4553Provided breakpoint bytes can be also used by @code{bp_loc_is_permanent} to
4554detect permanent breakpoints.  @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} should return
4555an unchanged memory copy if it was called for a location with permanent
4556breakpoint as some architectures use breakpoint instructions containing
4557arbitrary parameter value.
4558
4559Replaces all the other @var{BREAKPOINT} macros.
4560
4561@item int gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
4562@itemx gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
4563@findex gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint
4564@findex gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint
4565Insert or remove memory based breakpoints.  Reasonable defaults
4566(@code{default_memory_insert_breakpoint} and
4567@code{default_memory_remove_breakpoint} respectively) have been
4568provided so that it is not necessary to set these for most
4569architectures.  Architectures which may want to set
4570@code{gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint} and @code{gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint} will likely have instructions that are oddly sized or are not stored in a
4571conventional manner.
4572
4573It may also be desirable (from an efficiency standpoint) to define
4574custom breakpoint insertion and removal routines if
4575@code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} needs to read the target's memory for some
4576reason.
4577
4578@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bpaddr})
4579@findex gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address
4580@cindex breakpoint address adjusted
4581Given an address at which a breakpoint is desired, return a breakpoint
4582address adjusted to account for architectural constraints on
4583breakpoint placement.  This method is not needed by most targets.
4584
4585The FR-V target (see @file{frv-tdep.c}) requires this method.
4586The FR-V is a VLIW architecture in which a number of RISC-like
4587instructions are grouped (packed) together into an aggregate
4588instruction or instruction bundle.  When the processor executes
4589one of these bundles, the component instructions are executed
4590in parallel.
4591
4592In the course of optimization, the compiler may group instructions
4593from distinct source statements into the same bundle.  The line number
4594information associated with one of the latter statements will likely
4595refer to some instruction other than the first one in the bundle.  So,
4596if the user attempts to place a breakpoint on one of these latter
4597statements, @value{GDBN} must be careful to @emph{not} place the break
4598instruction on any instruction other than the first one in the bundle.
4599(Remember though that the instructions within a bundle execute
4600in parallel, so the @emph{first} instruction is the instruction
4601at the lowest address and has nothing to do with execution order.)
4602
4603The FR-V's @code{gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address} method will adjust a
4604breakpoint's address by scanning backwards for the beginning of
4605the bundle, returning the address of the bundle.
4606
4607Since the adjustment of a breakpoint may significantly alter a user's
4608expectation, @value{GDBN} prints a warning when an adjusted breakpoint
4609is initially set and each time that that breakpoint is hit.
4610
4611@item int gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})
4612@findex gdbarch_call_dummy_location
4613See the file @file{inferior.h}.
4614
4615This method has been replaced by @code{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}
4616(@pxref{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}).
4617
4618@item int gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regum})
4619@findex gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register
4620This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} cannot be fetched
4621from an inferior process.
4622
4623@item int gdbarch_cannot_store_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum})
4624@findex gdbarch_cannot_store_register
4625This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} should not be
4626written to the target.  This is often the case for program counters,
4627status words, and other special registers.  This function returns 0 as
4628default so that @value{GDBN} will assume that all registers may be written.
4629
4630@item int gdbarch_convert_register_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum}, struct type *@var{type})
4631@findex gdbarch_convert_register_p
4632Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} represents data values of type
4633@var{type} in a non-standard form.
4634@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
4635
4636@item int gdbarch_fp0_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
4637@findex gdbarch_fp0_regnum
4638This function returns the number of the first floating point register,
4639if the machine has such registers.  Otherwise, it returns -1.
4640
4641@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break (@var{gdbarch})
4642@findex gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break
4643This function shall return the amount by which to decrement the PC after the
4644program encounters a breakpoint.  This is often the number of bytes in
4645@code{BREAKPOINT}, though not always.  For most targets this value will be 0.
4646
4647@item DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK (@var{addr})
4648@findex DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK
4649If defined, this should evaluate to 1 if @var{addr} is in a shared
4650library in which breakpoints cannot be set and so should be disabled.
4651
4652@item int gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{dwarf2_regnr})
4653@findex gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum
4654Convert DWARF2 register number @var{dwarf2_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum.
4655If not defined, no conversion will be performed.
4656
4657@item int gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{ecoff_regnr})
4658@findex gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum
4659Convert ECOFF register number  @var{ecoff_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum.  If
4660not defined, no conversion will be performed.
4661
4662@item GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4663@itemx GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4664@findex GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4665@findex GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4666If defined, these are the names of the symbols that @value{GDBN} will
4667look for to detect that GCC compiled the file.  The default symbols
4668are @code{gcc_compiled.} and @code{gcc2_compiled.},
4669respectively.  (Currently only defined for the Delta 68.)
4670
4671@item gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
4672@findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
4673This function determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp}
4674will jump to, assuming that we have just stopped at a @code{longjmp}
4675breakpoint.  It takes a @code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the
4676target PC value through this pointer.  It examines the current state
4677of the machine as needed, typically by using a manually-determined
4678offset into the @code{jmp_buf}.  (While we might like to get the offset
4679from the target's @file{jmpbuf.h}, that header file cannot be assumed
4680to be available when building a cross-debugger.)
4681
4682@item DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
4683@findex DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
4684Shows that we are configured for an IBM RS/6000 system.  This
4685conditional should be eliminated (FIXME) and replaced by
4686feature-specific macros.  It was introduced in haste and we are
4687repenting at leisure.
4688
4689@item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
4690An x86-based target can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
4691support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
4692
4693@item gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
4694@findex gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p
4695Returns non-zero if the given @var{addr} is in the epilogue of a function.
4696The epilogue of a function is defined as the part of a function where
4697the stack frame of the function already has been destroyed up to the
4698final `return from function call' instruction.
4699
4700@item int gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{name})
4701@findex gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline
4702Define this function to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
4703trampoline that returns from a shared library.
4704
4705@item target_so_ops.in_dynsym_resolve_code (@var{pc})
4706@findex in_dynsym_resolve_code
4707Define this to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
4708dynamic linker.
4709
4710@item SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER (@var{pc})
4711@findex SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER
4712Define this to evaluate to the (nonzero) address at which execution
4713should continue to get past the dynamic linker's symbol resolution
4714function.  A zero value indicates that it is not important or necessary
4715to set a breakpoint to get through the dynamic linker and that single
4716stepping will suffice.
4717
4718@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_integer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
4719@findex gdbarch_integer_to_address
4720@cindex converting integers to addresses
4721Define this when the architecture needs to handle non-pointer to address
4722conversions specially.  Converts that value to an address according to
4723the current architectures conventions.
4724
4725@emph{Pragmatics: When the user copies a well defined expression from
4726their source code and passes it, as a parameter, to @value{GDBN}'s
4727@code{print} command, they should get the same value as would have been
4728computed by the target program.  Any deviation from this rule can cause
4729major confusion and annoyance, and needs to be justified carefully.  In
4730other words, @value{GDBN} doesn't really have the freedom to do these
4731conversions in clever and useful ways.  It has, however, been pointed
4732out that users aren't complaining about how @value{GDBN} casts integers
4733to pointers; they are complaining that they can't take an address from a
4734disassembly listing and give it to @code{x/i}.  Adding an architecture
4735method like @code{gdbarch_integer_to_address} certainly makes it possible for
4736@value{GDBN} to ``get it right'' in all circumstances.}
4737
4738@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always
4739Addresses}.
4740
4741@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
4742@findex gdbarch_pointer_to_address
4743Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
4744appropriate format for the current architecture.  Return the byte
4745address the pointer refers to.
4746@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
4747
4748@item void gdbarch_register_to_value(@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{regnum}, @var{type}, @var{fur})
4749@findex gdbarch_register_to_value
4750Convert the raw contents of register @var{regnum} into a value of type
4751@var{type}.
4752@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
4753
4754@item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL(@var{reg}, @var{type}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4755@findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL
4756Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its raw form to its virtual
4757form.
4758@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
4759
4760@item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW(@var{type}, @var{reg}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4761@findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW
4762Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its virtual form to its raw
4763form.
4764@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
4765
4766@item const struct regset *regset_from_core_section (struct gdbarch * @var{gdbarch}, const char * @var{sect_name}, size_t @var{sect_size})
4767@findex regset_from_core_section
4768Return the appropriate register set for a core file section with name
4769@var{sect_name} and size @var{sect_size}.
4770
4771@item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P()
4772@findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P
4773Define this as 1 if the target does not have a hardware single-step
4774mechanism.  The macro @code{SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP} must also be defined.
4775
4776@item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP(@var{signal}, @var{insert_breakpoints_p})
4777@findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP
4778A function that inserts or removes (depending on
4779@var{insert_breakpoints_p}) breakpoints at each possible destinations of
4780the next instruction.  See @file{sparc-tdep.c} and @file{rs6000-tdep.c}
4781for examples.
4782
4783@item set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing (@var{gdbarch}, @var{set})
4784@findex set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing
4785Somebody clever observed that, the more actual addresses you have in the
4786debug information, the more time the linker has to spend relocating
4787them.  So whenever there's some other way the debugger could find the
4788address it needs, you should omit it from the debug info, to make
4789linking faster.
4790
4791Calling @code{set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing} with a non-zero
4792argument @var{set} indicates that a particular set of hacks of this sort
4793are in use, affecting @code{N_SO} and @code{N_FUN} entries in stabs-format
4794debugging information.  @code{N_SO} stabs mark the beginning and ending
4795addresses of compilation units in the text segment.  @code{N_FUN} stabs
4796mark the starts and ends of functions.
4797
4798In this case, @value{GDBN} assumes two things:
4799
4800@itemize @bullet
4801@item
4802@code{N_FUN} stabs have an address of zero.  Instead of using those
4803addresses, you should find the address where the function starts by
4804taking the function name from the stab, and then looking that up in the
4805minsyms (the linker/assembler symbol table).  In other words, the stab
4806has the name, and the linker/assembler symbol table is the only place
4807that carries the address.
4808
4809@item
4810@code{N_SO} stabs have an address of zero, too.  You just look at the
4811@code{N_FUN} stabs that appear before and after the @code{N_SO} stab, and
4812guess the starting and ending addresses of the compilation unit from them.
4813@end itemize
4814
4815@item int gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type})
4816@findex gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr
4817@anchor{gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr} Define this function to return
4818nonzero if a function argument of type @var{type} is passed by reference
4819instead of value.
4820
4821@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_call (@var{gdbarch}, @var{function}, @var{regcache}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{nargs}, @var{args}, @var{sp}, @var{struct_return}, @var{struct_addr})
4822@findex gdbarch_push_dummy_call
4823@anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_call} Define this to push the dummy frame's call to
4824the inferior function onto the stack.  In addition to pushing @var{nargs}, the
4825code should push @var{struct_addr} (when @var{struct_return} is non-zero), and
4826the return address (@var{bp_addr}).
4827
4828@var{function} is a pointer to a @code{struct value}; on architectures that use
4829function descriptors, this contains the function descriptor value.
4830
4831Returns the updated top-of-stack pointer.
4832
4833@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sp}, @var{funaddr}, @var{using_gcc}, @var{args}, @var{nargs}, @var{value_type}, @var{real_pc}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{regcache})
4834@findex gdbarch_push_dummy_code
4835@anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_code} Given a stack based call dummy, push the
4836instruction sequence (including space for a breakpoint) to which the
4837called function should return.
4838
4839Set @var{bp_addr} to the address at which the breakpoint instruction
4840should be inserted, @var{real_pc} to the resume address when starting
4841the call sequence, and return the updated inner-most stack address.
4842
4843By default, the stack is grown sufficient to hold a frame-aligned
4844(@pxref{frame_align}) breakpoint, @var{bp_addr} is set to the address
4845reserved for that breakpoint, and @var{real_pc} set to @var{funaddr}.
4846
4847This method replaces @w{@code{gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4848
4849@item int gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sdb_regnr})
4850@findex gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum
4851Use this function to convert sdb register @var{sdb_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
4852regnum.  If not defined, no conversion will be done.
4853
4854@item enum return_value_convention gdbarch_return_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{valtype}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, void *@var{readbuf}, const void *@var{writebuf})
4855@findex gdbarch_return_value
4856@anchor{gdbarch_return_value} Given a function with a return-value of
4857type @var{rettype}, return which return-value convention that function
4858would use.
4859
4860@value{GDBN} currently recognizes two function return-value conventions:
4861@code{RETURN_VALUE_REGISTER_CONVENTION} where the return value is found
4862in registers; and @code{RETURN_VALUE_STRUCT_CONVENTION} where the return
4863value is found in memory and the address of that memory location is
4864passed in as the function's first parameter.
4865
4866If the register convention is being used, and @var{writebuf} is
4867non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return-value in @var{writebuf} into
4868@var{regcache}.
4869
4870If the register convention is being used, and @var{readbuf} is
4871non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return value from @var{regcache} into
4872@var{readbuf} (@var{regcache} contains a copy of the registers from the
4873just returned function).
4874
4875@emph{Maintainer note: This method replaces separate predicate, extract,
4876store methods.  By having only one method, the logic needed to determine
4877the return-value convention need only be implemented in one place.  If
4878@value{GDBN} were written in an @sc{oo} language, this method would
4879instead return an object that knew how to perform the register
4880return-value extract and store.}
4881
4882@emph{Maintainer note: This method does not take a @var{gcc_p}
4883parameter, and such a parameter should not be added.  If an architecture
4884that requires per-compiler or per-function information be identified,
4885then the replacement of @var{rettype} with @code{struct value}
4886@var{function} should be pursued.}
4887
4888@emph{Maintainer note: The @var{regcache} parameter limits this methods
4889to the inner most frame.  While replacing @var{regcache} with a
4890@code{struct frame_info} @var{frame} parameter would remove that
4891limitation there has yet to be a demonstrated need for such a change.}
4892
4893@item void gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache})
4894@findex gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint
4895Advance the inferior's PC past a permanent breakpoint.  @value{GDBN} normally
4896steps over a breakpoint by removing it, stepping one instruction, and
4897re-inserting the breakpoint.  However, permanent breakpoints are
4898hardwired into the inferior, and can't be removed, so this strategy
4899doesn't work.  Calling @code{gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint} adjusts the
4900processor's state so that execution will resume just after the breakpoint.
4901This function does the right thing even when the breakpoint is in the delay slot
4902of a branch or jump.
4903
4904@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{pc})
4905@findex gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code
4906If the target machine has trampoline code that sits between callers and
4907the functions being called, then define this function to return a new PC
4908that is at the start of the real function.
4909
4910@item int gdbarch_deprecated_fp_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
4911@findex gdbarch_deprecated_fp_regnum
4912If the frame pointer is in a register, use this function to return the
4913number of that register.
4914
4915@item int gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{stab_regnr})
4916@findex gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum
4917Use this function to convert stab register @var{stab_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
4918regnum.  If not defined, no conversion will be done.
4919
4920@item SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4921@findex SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4922The default value of the ``symbol-reloading'' variable.  (Never defined in
4923current sources.)
4924
4925@item TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4926@findex TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4927Number of bits in a char; defaults to 8.
4928
4929@item int gdbarch_char_signed (@var{gdbarch})
4930@findex gdbarch_char_signed
4931Non-zero if @code{char} is normally signed on this architecture; zero if
4932it should be unsigned.
4933
4934The ISO C standard requires the compiler to treat @code{char} as
4935equivalent to either @code{signed char} or @code{unsigned char}; any
4936character in the standard execution set is supposed to be positive.
4937Most compilers treat @code{char} as signed, but @code{char} is unsigned
4938on the IBM S/390, RS6000, and PowerPC targets.
4939
4940@item int gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4941@findex gdbarch_double_bit
4942Number of bits in a double float; defaults to @w{@code{8 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4943
4944@item int gdbarch_float_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4945@findex gdbarch_float_bit
4946Number of bits in a float; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4947
4948@item int gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4949@findex gdbarch_int_bit
4950Number of bits in an integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4951
4952@item int gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4953@findex gdbarch_long_bit
4954Number of bits in a long integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4955
4956@item int gdbarch_long_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4957@findex gdbarch_long_double_bit
4958Number of bits in a long double float;
4959defaults to @w{@code{2 * gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4960
4961@item int gdbarch_long_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4962@findex gdbarch_long_long_bit
4963Number of bits in a long long integer; defaults to
4964@w{@code{2 * gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4965
4966@item int gdbarch_ptr_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4967@findex gdbarch_ptr_bit
4968Number of bits in a pointer; defaults to
4969@w{@code{gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4970
4971@item int gdbarch_short_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4972@findex gdbarch_short_bit
4973Number of bits in a short integer; defaults to @w{@code{2 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4974
4975@item void gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{frame_regnum}, @var{frame_offset})
4976@findex gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer
4977Returns a @code{(@var{register}, @var{offset})} pair representing the virtual
4978frame pointer in use at the code address @var{pc}.  If virtual frame
4979pointers are not used, a default definition simply returns
4980@code{gdbarch_deprecated_fp_regnum} (or @code{gdbarch_sp_regnum}, if
4981no frame pointer is defined), with an offset of zero.
4982
4983@c need to explain virtual frame pointers, they are recorded in agent
4984@c expressions for tracepoints
4985
4986@item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
4987If non-zero, the target has support for hardware-assisted
4988watchpoints.  @xref{Algorithms, watchpoints}, for more details and
4989other related macros.
4990
4991@item int gdbarch_print_insn (@var{gdbarch}, @var{vma}, @var{info})
4992@findex gdbarch_print_insn
4993This is the function used by @value{GDBN} to print an assembly
4994instruction.  It prints the instruction at address @var{vma} in
4995debugged memory and returns the length of the instruction, in bytes.
4996This usually points to a function in the @code{opcodes} library
4997(@pxref{Support Libraries, ,Opcodes}).  @var{info} is a structure (of
4998type @code{disassemble_info}) defined in the header file
4999@file{include/dis-asm.h}, and used to pass information to the
5000instruction decoding routine.
5001
5002@item frame_id gdbarch_dummy_id (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame})
5003@findex gdbarch_dummy_id
5004@anchor{gdbarch_dummy_id} Given @var{frame} return a @w{@code{struct
5005frame_id}} that uniquely identifies an inferior function call's dummy
5006frame.  The value returned must match the dummy frame stack value
5007previously saved by @code{call_function_by_hand}.
5008
5009@item void gdbarch_value_to_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
5010@findex gdbarch_value_to_register
5011Convert a value of type @var{type} into the raw contents of a register.
5012@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
5013
5014@end table
5015
5016Motorola M68K target conditionals.
5017
5018@ftable @code
5019@item BPT_VECTOR
5020Define this to be the 4-bit location of the breakpoint trap vector.  If
5021not defined, it will default to @code{0xf}.
5022
5023@item REMOTE_BPT_VECTOR
5024Defaults to @code{1}.
5025
5026@end ftable
5027
5028@node Adding a New Target
5029@section Adding a New Target
5030
5031@cindex adding a target
5032The following files add a target to @value{GDBN}:
5033
5034@table @file
5035@cindex target dependent files
5036
5037@item gdb/@var{ttt}-tdep.c
5038Contains any miscellaneous code required for this target machine.  On
5039some machines it doesn't exist at all.
5040
5041@item gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.c
5042@itemx gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.h
5043This is required to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
5044processor chip (registers, stack, etc.).  It can be shared among many
5045targets that use the same processor architecture.
5046
5047@end table
5048
5049(Target header files such as
5050@file{gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{ttt}.h},
5051@file{gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{arch}.h}, and
5052@file{config/tm-@var{os}.h} are no longer used.)
5053
5054@findex _initialize_@var{arch}_tdep
5055A @value{GDBN} description for a new architecture, arch is created by
5056defining a global function @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep}, by
5057convention in the source file @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}.  For
5058example, in the case of the OpenRISC 1000, this function is called
5059@code{_initialize_or1k_tdep} and is found in the file
5060@file{or1k-tdep.c}.
5061
5062The object file resulting from compiling this source file, which will
5063contain the implementation of the
5064@code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function is specified in the
5065@value{GDBN} @file{configure.tgt} file, which includes a large case
5066statement pattern matching against the @code{--target} option of the
5067@kbd{configure} script.
5068
5069@quotation
5070@emph{Note:} If the architecture requires multiple source files, the
5071corresponding binaries should be included in
5072@file{configure.tgt}. However if there are header files, the
5073dependencies on these will not be picked up from the entries in
5074@file{configure.tgt}. The @file{Makefile.in} file will need extending to
5075show these dependencies.
5076@end quotation
5077
5078@findex gdbarch_register
5079A new struct gdbarch, defining the new architecture, is created within
5080the @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function by calling
5081@code{gdbarch_register}:
5082
5083@smallexample
5084void gdbarch_register (enum bfd_architecture    architecture,
5085                       gdbarch_init_ftype      *init_func,
5086                       gdbarch_dump_tdep_ftype *tdep_dump_func);
5087@end smallexample
5088
5089This function has been described fully in an earlier
5090section.  @xref{How an Architecture is Represented, , How an
5091Architecture is Represented}.
5092
5093The new @code{@w{struct gdbarch}} should contain implementations of
5094the necessary functions (described in the previous sections) to
5095describe the basic layout of the target machine's processor chip
5096(registers, stack, etc.).  It can be shared among many targets that use
5097the same processor architecture.
5098
5099@node Target Descriptions
5100@chapter Target Descriptions
5101@cindex target descriptions
5102
5103The target architecture definition (@pxref{Target Architecture Definition})
5104contains @value{GDBN}'s hard-coded knowledge about an architecture.  For
5105some platforms, it is handy to have more flexible knowledge about a specific
5106instance of the architecture---for instance, a processor or development board.
5107@dfn{Target descriptions} provide a mechanism for the user to tell @value{GDBN}
5108more about what their target supports, or for the target to tell @value{GDBN}
5109directly.
5110
5111For details on writing, automatically supplying, and manually selecting
5112target descriptions, see @ref{Target Descriptions, , , gdb,
5113Debugging with @value{GDBN}}.  This section will cover some related
5114topics about the @value{GDBN} internals.
5115
5116@menu
5117* Target Descriptions Implementation::
5118* Adding Target Described Register Support::
5119@end menu
5120
5121@node Target Descriptions Implementation
5122@section Target Descriptions Implementation
5123@cindex target descriptions, implementation
5124
5125Before @value{GDBN} connects to a new target, or runs a new program on
5126an existing target, it discards any existing target description and
5127reverts to a default gdbarch.  Then, after connecting, it looks for a
5128new target description by calling @code{target_find_description}.
5129
5130A description may come from a user specified file (XML), the remote
5131@samp{qXfer:features:read} packet (also XML), or from any custom
5132@code{to_read_description} routine in the target vector.  For instance,
5133the remote target supports guessing whether a MIPS target is 32-bit or
513464-bit based on the size of the @samp{g} packet.
5135
5136If any target description is found, @value{GDBN} creates a new gdbarch
5137incorporating the description by calling @code{gdbarch_update_p}.  Any
5138@samp{<architecture>} element is handled first, to determine which
5139architecture's gdbarch initialization routine is called to create the
5140new architecture.  Then the initialization routine is called, and has
5141a chance to adjust the constructed architecture based on the contents
5142of the target description.  For instance, it can recognize any
5143properties set by a @code{to_read_description} routine.  Also
5144see @ref{Adding Target Described Register Support}.
5145
5146@node Adding Target Described Register Support
5147@section Adding Target Described Register Support
5148@cindex target descriptions, adding register support
5149
5150Target descriptions can report additional registers specific to an
5151instance of the target.  But it takes a little work in the architecture
5152specific routines to support this.
5153
5154A target description must either have no registers or a complete
5155set---this avoids complexity in trying to merge standard registers
5156with the target defined registers.  It is the architecture's
5157responsibility to validate that a description with registers has
5158everything it needs.  To keep architecture code simple, the same
5159mechanism is used to assign fixed internal register numbers to
5160standard registers.
5161
5162If @code{tdesc_has_registers} returns 1, the description contains
5163registers.  The architecture's @code{gdbarch_init} routine should:
5164
5165@itemize @bullet
5166
5167@item
5168Call @code{tdesc_data_alloc} to allocate storage, early, before
5169searching for a matching gdbarch or allocating a new one.
5170
5171@item
5172Use @code{tdesc_find_feature} to locate standard features by name.
5173
5174@item
5175Use @code{tdesc_numbered_register} and @code{tdesc_numbered_register_choices}
5176to locate the expected registers in the standard features.
5177
5178@item
5179Return @code{NULL} if a required feature is missing, or if any standard
5180feature is missing expected registers.  This will produce a warning that
5181the description was incomplete.
5182
5183@item
5184Free the allocated data before returning, unless @code{tdesc_use_registers}
5185is called.
5186
5187@item
5188Call @code{set_gdbarch_num_regs} as usual, with a number higher than any
5189fixed number passed to @code{tdesc_numbered_register}.
5190
5191@item
5192Call @code{tdesc_use_registers} after creating a new gdbarch, before
5193returning it.
5194
5195@end itemize
5196
5197After @code{tdesc_use_registers} has been called, the architecture's
5198@code{register_name}, @code{register_type}, and @code{register_reggroup_p}
5199routines will not be called; that information will be taken from
5200the target description.  @code{num_regs} may be increased to account
5201for any additional registers in the description.
5202
5203Pseudo-registers require some extra care:
5204
5205@itemize @bullet
5206
5207@item
5208Using @code{tdesc_numbered_register} allows the architecture to give
5209constant register numbers to standard architectural registers, e.g.@:
5210as an @code{enum} in @file{@var{arch}-tdep.h}.  But because
5211pseudo-registers are always numbered above @code{num_regs},
5212which may be increased by the description, constant numbers
5213can not be used for pseudos.  They must be numbered relative to
5214@code{num_regs} instead.
5215
5216@item
5217The description will not describe pseudo-registers, so the
5218architecture must call @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_name},
5219@code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_type}, and
5220@code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_reggroup_p} to supply routines
5221describing pseudo registers.  These routines will be passed
5222internal register numbers, so the same routines used for the
5223gdbarch equivalents are usually suitable.
5224
5225@end itemize
5226
5227
5228@node Target Vector Definition
5229
5230@chapter Target Vector Definition
5231@cindex target vector
5232
5233The target vector defines the interface between @value{GDBN}'s
5234abstract handling of target systems, and the nitty-gritty code that
5235actually exercises control over a process or a serial port.
5236@value{GDBN} includes some 30-40 different target vectors; however,
5237each configuration of @value{GDBN} includes only a few of them.
5238
5239@menu
5240* Managing Execution State::
5241* Existing Targets::
5242@end menu
5243
5244@node Managing Execution State
5245@section Managing Execution State
5246@cindex execution state
5247
5248A target vector can be completely inactive (not pushed on the target
5249stack), active but not running (pushed, but not connected to a fully
5250manifested inferior), or completely active (pushed, with an accessible
5251inferior).  Most targets are only completely inactive or completely
5252active, but some support persistent connections to a target even
5253when the target has exited or not yet started.
5254
5255For example, connecting to the simulator using @code{target sim} does
5256not create a running program.  Neither registers nor memory are
5257accessible until @code{run}.  Similarly, after @code{kill}, the
5258program can not continue executing.  But in both cases @value{GDBN}
5259remains connected to the simulator, and target-specific commands
5260are directed to the simulator.
5261
5262A target which only supports complete activation should push itself
5263onto the stack in its @code{to_open} routine (by calling
5264@code{push_target}), and unpush itself from the stack in its
5265@code{to_mourn_inferior} routine (by calling @code{unpush_target}).
5266
5267A target which supports both partial and complete activation should
5268still call @code{push_target} in @code{to_open}, but not call
5269@code{unpush_target} in @code{to_mourn_inferior}.  Instead, it should
5270call either @code{target_mark_running} or @code{target_mark_exited}
5271in its @code{to_open}, depending on whether the target is fully active
5272after connection.  It should also call @code{target_mark_running} any
5273time the inferior becomes fully active (e.g.@: in
5274@code{to_create_inferior} and @code{to_attach}), and
5275@code{target_mark_exited} when the inferior becomes inactive (in
5276@code{to_mourn_inferior}).  The target should also make sure to call
5277@code{target_mourn_inferior} from its @code{to_kill}, to return the
5278target to inactive state.
5279
5280@node Existing Targets
5281@section Existing Targets
5282@cindex targets
5283
5284@subsection File Targets
5285
5286Both executables and core files have target vectors.
5287
5288@subsection Standard Protocol and Remote Stubs
5289
5290@value{GDBN}'s file @file{remote.c} talks a serial protocol to code that
5291runs in the target system.  @value{GDBN} provides several sample
5292@dfn{stubs} that can be integrated into target programs or operating
5293systems for this purpose; they are named @file{@var{cpu}-stub.c}.  Many
5294operating systems, embedded targets, emulators, and simulators already
5295have a @value{GDBN} stub built into them, and maintenance of the remote
5296protocol must be careful to preserve compatibility.
5297
5298The @value{GDBN} user's manual describes how to put such a stub into
5299your target code.  What follows is a discussion of integrating the
5300SPARC stub into a complicated operating system (rather than a simple
5301program), by Stu Grossman, the author of this stub.
5302
5303The trap handling code in the stub assumes the following upon entry to
5304@code{trap_low}:
5305
5306@enumerate
5307@item
5308%l1 and %l2 contain pc and npc respectively at the time of the trap;
5309
5310@item
5311traps are disabled;
5312
5313@item
5314you are in the correct trap window.
5315@end enumerate
5316
5317As long as your trap handler can guarantee those conditions, then there
5318is no reason why you shouldn't be able to ``share'' traps with the stub.
5319The stub has no requirement that it be jumped to directly from the
5320hardware trap vector.  That is why it calls @code{exceptionHandler()},
5321which is provided by the external environment.  For instance, this could
5322set up the hardware traps to actually execute code which calls the stub
5323first, and then transfers to its own trap handler.
5324
5325For the most point, there probably won't be much of an issue with
5326``sharing'' traps, as the traps we use are usually not used by the kernel,
5327and often indicate unrecoverable error conditions.  Anyway, this is all
5328controlled by a table, and is trivial to modify.  The most important
5329trap for us is for @code{ta 1}.  Without that, we can't single step or
5330do breakpoints.  Everything else is unnecessary for the proper operation
5331of the debugger/stub.
5332
5333From reading the stub, it's probably not obvious how breakpoints work.
5334They are simply done by deposit/examine operations from @value{GDBN}.
5335
5336@subsection ROM Monitor Interface
5337
5338@subsection Custom Protocols
5339
5340@subsection Transport Layer
5341
5342@subsection Builtin Simulator
5343
5344
5345@node Native Debugging
5346
5347@chapter Native Debugging
5348@cindex native debugging
5349
5350Several files control @value{GDBN}'s configuration for native support:
5351
5352@table @file
5353@vindex NATDEPFILES
5354@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
5355Specifies Makefile fragments needed by a @emph{native} configuration on
5356machine @var{xyz}.  In particular, this lists the required
5357native-dependent object files, by defining @samp{NATDEPFILES=@dots{}}.
5358Also specifies the header file which describes native support on
5359@var{xyz}, by defining @samp{NAT_FILE= nm-@var{xyz}.h}.  You can also
5360define @samp{NAT_CFLAGS}, @samp{NAT_ADD_FILES}, @samp{NAT_CLIBS},
5361@samp{NAT_CDEPS}, @samp{NAT_GENERATED_FILES}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
5362
5363@emph{Maintainer's note: The @file{.mh} suffix is because this file
5364originally contained @file{Makefile} fragments for hosting @value{GDBN}
5365on machine @var{xyz}.  While the file is no longer used for this
5366purpose, the @file{.mh} suffix remains.  Perhaps someone will
5367eventually rename these fragments so that they have a @file{.mn}
5368suffix.}
5369
5370@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/nm-@var{xyz}.h
5371(@file{nm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}).  Contains C
5372macro definitions describing the native system environment, such as
5373child process control and core file support.
5374
5375@item gdb/@var{xyz}-nat.c
5376Contains any miscellaneous C code required for this native support of
5377this machine.  On some machines it doesn't exist at all.
5378@end table
5379
5380There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
5381various systems.  These can be customized in various ways by macros
5382defined in your @file{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file.  If these routines work for
5383the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
5384@samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{NATDEPFILES}.
5385
5386Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
5387to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
5388Put them into @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c}, and put @file{@var{xyz}-nat.o}
5389into @code{NATDEPFILES}.
5390
5391@table @file
5392@item inftarg.c
5393This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
5394processes on systems which use ptrace and wait to control the child.
5395
5396@item procfs.c
5397This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
5398processes on systems which use /proc to control the child.
5399
5400@item fork-child.c
5401This does the low-level grunge that uses Unix system calls to do a ``fork
5402and exec'' to start up a child process.
5403
5404@item infptrace.c
5405This is the low level interface to inferior processes for systems using
5406the Unix @code{ptrace} call in a vanilla way.
5407@end table
5408
5409@section ptrace
5410
5411@section /proc
5412
5413@section win32
5414
5415@section shared libraries
5416
5417@section Native Conditionals
5418@cindex native conditionals
5419
5420When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
5421defined or left undefined, to control compilation when the host and
5422target systems are the same.  These macros should be defined (or left
5423undefined) in @file{nm-@var{system}.h}.
5424
5425@table @code
5426
5427@item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
5428An x86-based machine can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
5429support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
5430
5431@item SOLIB_ADD (@var{filename}, @var{from_tty}, @var{targ}, @var{readsyms})
5432@findex SOLIB_ADD
5433Define this to expand into an expression that will cause the symbols in
5434@var{filename} to be added to @value{GDBN}'s symbol table.  If
5435@var{readsyms} is zero symbols are not read but any necessary low level
5436processing for @var{filename} is still done.
5437
5438@item SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
5439@findex SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
5440Define this to expand into any shared-library-relocation code that you
5441want to be run just after the child process has been forked.
5442
5443@item START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
5444@findex START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
5445When starting an inferior, @value{GDBN} normally expects to trap
5446twice; once when
5447the shell execs, and once when the program itself execs.  If the actual
5448number of traps is something other than 2, then define this macro to
5449expand into the number expected.
5450
5451@end table
5452
5453@node Support Libraries
5454
5455@chapter Support Libraries
5456
5457@section BFD
5458@cindex BFD library
5459
5460BFD provides support for @value{GDBN} in several ways:
5461
5462@table @emph
5463@item identifying executable and core files
5464BFD will identify a variety of file types, including a.out, coff, and
5465several variants thereof, as well as several kinds of core files.
5466
5467@item access to sections of files
5468BFD parses the file headers to determine the names, virtual addresses,
5469sizes, and file locations of all the various named sections in files
5470(such as the text section or the data section).  @value{GDBN} simply
5471calls BFD to read or write section @var{x} at byte offset @var{y} for
5472length @var{z}.
5473
5474@item specialized core file support
5475BFD provides routines to determine the failing command name stored in a
5476core file, the signal with which the program failed, and whether a core
5477file matches (i.e.@: could be a core dump of) a particular executable
5478file.
5479
5480@item locating the symbol information
5481@value{GDBN} uses an internal interface of BFD to determine where to find the
5482symbol information in an executable file or symbol-file.  @value{GDBN} itself
5483handles the reading of symbols, since BFD does not ``understand'' debug
5484symbols, but @value{GDBN} uses BFD's cached information to find the symbols,
5485string table, etc.
5486@end table
5487
5488@section opcodes
5489@cindex opcodes library
5490
5491The opcodes library provides @value{GDBN}'s disassembler.  (It's a separate
5492library because it's also used in binutils, for @file{objdump}).
5493
5494@section readline
5495@cindex readline library
5496The @code{readline} library provides a set of functions for use by applications
5497that allow users to edit command lines as they are typed in.
5498
5499@section libiberty
5500@cindex @code{libiberty} library
5501
5502The @code{libiberty} library provides a set of functions and features
5503that integrate and improve on functionality found in modern operating
5504systems.  Broadly speaking, such features can be divided into three
5505groups: supplemental functions (functions that may be missing in some
5506environments and operating systems), replacement functions (providing
5507a uniform and easier to use interface for commonly used standard
5508functions), and extensions (which provide additional functionality
5509beyond standard functions).
5510
5511@value{GDBN} uses various features provided by the @code{libiberty}
5512library, for instance the C@t{++} demangler, the @acronym{IEEE}
5513floating format support functions, the input options parser
5514@samp{getopt}, the @samp{obstack} extension, and other functions.
5515
5516@subsection @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN}
5517@cindex @code{obstacks}
5518
5519The obstack mechanism provides a convenient way to allocate and free
5520chunks of memory.  Each obstack is a pool of memory that is managed
5521like a stack.  Objects (of any nature, size and alignment) are
5522allocated and freed in a @acronym{LIFO} fashion on an obstack (see
5523@code{libiberty}'s documentation for a more detailed explanation of
5524@code{obstacks}).
5525
5526The most noticeable use of the @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN} is in
5527object files.  There is an obstack associated with each internal
5528representation of an object file.  Lots of things get allocated on
5529these @code{obstacks}: dictionary entries, blocks, blockvectors,
5530symbols, minimal symbols, types, vectors of fundamental types, class
5531fields of types, object files section lists, object files section
5532offset lists, line tables, symbol tables, partial symbol tables,
5533string tables, symbol table private data, macros tables, debug
5534information sections and entries, import and export lists (som),
5535unwind information (hppa), dwarf2 location expressions data.  Plus
5536various strings such as directory names strings, debug format strings,
5537names of types.
5538
5539An essential and convenient property of all data on @code{obstacks} is
5540that memory for it gets allocated (with @code{obstack_alloc}) at
5541various times during a debugging session, but it is released all at
5542once using the @code{obstack_free} function.  The @code{obstack_free}
5543function takes a pointer to where in the stack it must start the
5544deletion from (much like the cleanup chains have a pointer to where to
5545start the cleanups).  Because of the stack like structure of the
5546@code{obstacks}, this allows to free only a top portion of the
5547obstack.  There are a few instances in @value{GDBN} where such thing
5548happens.  Calls to @code{obstack_free} are done after some local data
5549is allocated to the obstack.  Only the local data is deleted from the
5550obstack.  Of course this assumes that nothing between the
5551@code{obstack_alloc} and the @code{obstack_free} allocates anything
5552else on the same obstack.  For this reason it is best and safest to
5553use temporary @code{obstacks}.
5554
5555Releasing the whole obstack is also not safe per se.  It is safe only
5556under the condition that we know the @code{obstacks} memory is no
5557longer needed.  In @value{GDBN} we get rid of the @code{obstacks} only
5558when we get rid of the whole objfile(s), for instance upon reading a
5559new symbol file.
5560
5561@section gnu-regex
5562@cindex regular expressions library
5563
5564Regex conditionals.
5565
5566@table @code
5567@item C_ALLOCA
5568
5569@item NFAILURES
5570
5571@item RE_NREGS
5572
5573@item SIGN_EXTEND_CHAR
5574
5575@item SWITCH_ENUM_BUG
5576
5577@item SYNTAX_TABLE
5578
5579@item Sword
5580
5581@item sparc
5582@end table
5583
5584@section Array Containers
5585@cindex Array Containers
5586@cindex VEC
5587
5588Often it is necessary to manipulate a dynamic array of a set of
5589objects.  C forces some bookkeeping on this, which can get cumbersome
5590and repetitive.  The @file{vec.h} file contains macros for defining
5591and using a typesafe vector type.  The functions defined will be
5592inlined when compiling, and so the abstraction cost should be zero.
5593Domain checks are added to detect programming errors.
5594
5595An example use would be an array of symbols or section information.
5596The array can be grown as symbols are read in (or preallocated), and
5597the accessor macros provided keep care of all the necessary
5598bookkeeping.  Because the arrays are type safe, there is no danger of
5599accidentally mixing up the contents.  Think of these as C++ templates,
5600but implemented in C.
5601
5602Because of the different behavior of structure objects, scalar objects
5603and of pointers, there are three flavors of vector, one for each of
5604these variants.  Both the structure object and pointer variants pass
5605pointers to objects around --- in the former case the pointers are
5606stored into the vector and in the latter case the pointers are
5607dereferenced and the objects copied into the vector.  The scalar
5608object variant is suitable for @code{int}-like objects, and the vector
5609elements are returned by value.
5610
5611There are both @code{index} and @code{iterate} accessors.  The iterator
5612returns a boolean iteration condition and updates the iteration
5613variable passed by reference.  Because the iterator will be inlined,
5614the address-of can be optimized away.
5615
5616The vectors are implemented using the trailing array idiom, thus they
5617are not resizeable without changing the address of the vector object
5618itself.  This means you cannot have variables or fields of vector type
5619--- always use a pointer to a vector.  The one exception is the final
5620field of a structure, which could be a vector type.  You will have to
5621use the @code{embedded_size} & @code{embedded_init} calls to create
5622such objects, and they will probably not be resizeable (so don't use
5623the @dfn{safe} allocation variants).  The trailing array idiom is used
5624(rather than a pointer to an array of data), because, if we allow
5625@code{NULL} to also represent an empty vector, empty vectors occupy
5626minimal space in the structure containing them.
5627
5628Each operation that increases the number of active elements is
5629available in @dfn{quick} and @dfn{safe} variants.  The former presumes
5630that there is sufficient allocated space for the operation to succeed
5631(it dies if there is not).  The latter will reallocate the vector, if
5632needed.  Reallocation causes an exponential increase in vector size.
5633If you know you will be adding N elements, it would be more efficient
5634to use the reserve operation before adding the elements with the
5635@dfn{quick} operation.  This will ensure there are at least as many
5636elements as you ask for, it will exponentially increase if there are
5637too few spare slots.  If you want reserve a specific number of slots,
5638but do not want the exponential increase (for instance, you know this
5639is the last allocation), use a negative number for reservation.  You
5640can also create a vector of a specific size from the get go.
5641
5642You should prefer the push and pop operations, as they append and
5643remove from the end of the vector.  If you need to remove several items
5644in one go, use the truncate operation.  The insert and remove
5645operations allow you to change elements in the middle of the vector.
5646There are two remove operations, one which preserves the element
5647ordering @code{ordered_remove}, and one which does not
5648@code{unordered_remove}.  The latter function copies the end element
5649into the removed slot, rather than invoke a memmove operation.  The
5650@code{lower_bound} function will determine where to place an item in
5651the array using insert that will maintain sorted order.
5652
5653If you need to directly manipulate a vector, then the @code{address}
5654accessor will return the address of the start of the vector.  Also the
5655@code{space} predicate will tell you whether there is spare capacity in the
5656vector.  You will not normally need to use these two functions.
5657
5658Vector types are defined using a
5659@code{DEF_VEC_@{O,P,I@}(@var{typename})} macro.  Variables of vector
5660type are declared using a @code{VEC(@var{typename})} macro.  The
5661characters @code{O}, @code{P} and @code{I} indicate whether
5662@var{typename} is an object (@code{O}), pointer (@code{P}) or integral
5663(@code{I}) type.  Be careful to pick the correct one, as you'll get an
5664awkward and inefficient API if you use the wrong one.  There is a
5665check, which results in a compile-time warning, for the @code{P} and
5666@code{I} versions, but there is no check for the @code{O} versions, as
5667that is not possible in plain C.
5668
5669An example of their use would be,
5670
5671@smallexample
5672DEF_VEC_P(tree);   // non-managed tree vector.
5673
5674struct my_struct @{
5675  VEC(tree) *v;      // A (pointer to) a vector of tree pointers.
5676@};
5677
5678struct my_struct *s;
5679
5680if (VEC_length(tree, s->v)) @{ we have some contents @}
5681VEC_safe_push(tree, s->v, decl); // append some decl onto the end
5682for (ix = 0; VEC_iterate(tree, s->v, ix, elt); ix++)
5683  @{ do something with elt @}
5684
5685@end smallexample
5686
5687The @file{vec.h} file provides details on how to invoke the various
5688accessors provided.  They are enumerated here:
5689
5690@table @code
5691@item VEC_length
5692Return the number of items in the array,
5693
5694@item VEC_empty
5695Return true if the array has no elements.
5696
5697@item VEC_last
5698@itemx VEC_index
5699Return the last or arbitrary item in the array.
5700
5701@item VEC_iterate
5702Access an array element and indicate whether the array has been
5703traversed.
5704
5705@item VEC_alloc
5706@itemx VEC_free
5707Create and destroy an array.
5708
5709@item VEC_embedded_size
5710@itemx VEC_embedded_init
5711Helpers for embedding an array as the final element of another struct.
5712
5713@item VEC_copy
5714Duplicate an array.
5715
5716@item VEC_space
5717Return the amount of free space in an array.
5718
5719@item VEC_reserve
5720Ensure a certain amount of free space.
5721
5722@item VEC_quick_push
5723@itemx VEC_safe_push
5724Append to an array, either assuming the space is available, or making
5725sure that it is.
5726
5727@item VEC_pop
5728Remove the last item from an array.
5729
5730@item VEC_truncate
5731Remove several items from the end of an array.
5732
5733@item VEC_safe_grow
5734Add several items to the end of an array.
5735
5736@item VEC_replace
5737Overwrite an item in the array.
5738
5739@item VEC_quick_insert
5740@itemx VEC_safe_insert
5741Insert an item into the middle of the array.  Either the space must
5742already exist, or the space is created.
5743
5744@item VEC_ordered_remove
5745@itemx VEC_unordered_remove
5746Remove an item from the array, preserving order or not.
5747
5748@item VEC_block_remove
5749Remove a set of items from the array.
5750
5751@item VEC_address
5752Provide the address of the first element.
5753
5754@item VEC_lower_bound
5755Binary search the array.
5756
5757@end table
5758
5759@section include
5760
5761@node Coding Standards
5762
5763@chapter Coding Standards
5764@cindex coding standards
5765
5766@section @value{GDBN} C Coding Standards
5767
5768@value{GDBN} follows the GNU coding standards, as described in
5769@file{etc/standards.texi}.  This file is also available for anonymous
5770FTP from GNU archive sites.  @value{GDBN} takes a strict interpretation
5771of the standard; in general, when the GNU standard recommends a practice
5772but does not require it, @value{GDBN} requires it.
5773
5774@value{GDBN} follows an additional set of coding standards specific to
5775@value{GDBN}, as described in the following sections.
5776
5777@subsection ISO C
5778
5779@value{GDBN} assumes an ISO/IEC 9899:1990 (a.k.a.@: ISO C90) compliant
5780compiler.
5781
5782@value{GDBN} does not assume an ISO C or POSIX compliant C library.
5783
5784@subsection Formatting
5785
5786@cindex source code formatting
5787The standard GNU recommendations for formatting must be followed
5788strictly.  Any @value{GDBN}-specific deviation from GNU
5789recomendations is described below.
5790
5791A function declaration should not have its name in column zero.  A
5792function definition should have its name in column zero.
5793
5794@smallexample
5795/* Declaration */
5796static void foo (void);
5797/* Definition */
5798void
5799foo (void)
5800@{
5801@}
5802@end smallexample
5803
5804@emph{Pragmatics: This simplifies scripting.  Function definitions can
5805be found using @samp{^function-name}.}
5806
5807There must be a space between a function or macro name and the opening
5808parenthesis of its argument list (except for macro definitions, as
5809required by C).  There must not be a space after an open paren/bracket
5810or before a close paren/bracket.
5811
5812While additional whitespace is generally helpful for reading, do not use
5813more than one blank line to separate blocks, and avoid adding whitespace
5814after the end of a program line (as of 1/99, some 600 lines had
5815whitespace after the semicolon).  Excess whitespace causes difficulties
5816for @code{diff} and @code{patch} utilities.
5817
5818Pointers are declared using the traditional K&R C style:
5819
5820@smallexample
5821void *foo;
5822@end smallexample
5823
5824@noindent
5825and not:
5826
5827@smallexample
5828void * foo;
5829void* foo;
5830@end smallexample
5831
5832In addition, whitespace around casts and unary operators should follow
5833the following guidelines:
5834
5835@multitable @columnfractions .2 .2 .8
5836@item Use... @tab ...instead of @tab
5837
5838@item @code{!x}
5839@tab @code{! x}
5840@item @code{~x}
5841@tab @code{~ x}
5842@item @code{-x}
5843@tab @code{- x}
5844@tab (unary minus)
5845@item @code{(foo) x}
5846@tab @code{(foo)x}
5847@tab (cast)
5848@item @code{*x}
5849@tab @code{* x}
5850@tab (pointer dereference)
5851@end multitable
5852
5853@subsection Comments
5854
5855@cindex comment formatting
5856The standard GNU requirements on comments must be followed strictly.
5857
5858Block comments must appear in the following form, with no @code{/*}- or
5859@code{*/}-only lines, and no leading @code{*}:
5860
5861@smallexample
5862/* Wait for control to return from inferior to debugger.  If inferior
5863   gets a signal, we may decide to start it up again instead of
5864   returning.  That is why there is a loop in this function.  When
5865   this function actually returns it means the inferior should be left
5866   stopped and @value{GDBN} should read more commands.  */
5867@end smallexample
5868
5869(Note that this format is encouraged by Emacs; tabbing for a multi-line
5870comment works correctly, and @kbd{M-q} fills the block consistently.)
5871
5872Put a blank line between the block comments preceding function or
5873variable definitions, and the definition itself.
5874
5875In general, put function-body comments on lines by themselves, rather
5876than trying to fit them into the 20 characters left at the end of a
5877line, since either the comment or the code will inevitably get longer
5878than will fit, and then somebody will have to move it anyhow.
5879
5880@subsection C Usage
5881
5882@cindex C data types
5883Code must not depend on the sizes of C data types, the format of the
5884host's floating point numbers, the alignment of anything, or the order
5885of evaluation of expressions.
5886
5887@cindex function usage
5888Use functions freely.  There are only a handful of compute-bound areas
5889in @value{GDBN} that might be affected by the overhead of a function
5890call, mainly in symbol reading.  Most of @value{GDBN}'s performance is
5891limited by the target interface (whether serial line or system call).
5892
5893However, use functions with moderation.  A thousand one-line functions
5894are just as hard to understand as a single thousand-line function.
5895
5896@emph{Macros are bad, M'kay.}
5897(But if you have to use a macro, make sure that the macro arguments are
5898protected with parentheses.)
5899
5900@cindex types
5901
5902Declarations like @samp{struct foo *} should be used in preference to
5903declarations like @samp{typedef struct foo @{ @dots{} @} *foo_ptr}.
5904
5905@subsection Function Prototypes
5906@cindex function prototypes
5907
5908Prototypes must be used when both @emph{declaring} and @emph{defining}
5909a function.  Prototypes for @value{GDBN} functions must include both the
5910argument type and name, with the name matching that used in the actual
5911function definition.
5912
5913All external functions should have a declaration in a header file that
5914callers include, except for @code{_initialize_*} functions, which must
5915be external so that @file{init.c} construction works, but shouldn't be
5916visible to random source files.
5917
5918Where a source file needs a forward declaration of a static function,
5919that declaration must appear in a block near the top of the source file.
5920
5921@subsection File Names
5922
5923Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be in lower
5924case.  Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be 8.3
5925unique.  These requirements apply to both source and generated files.
5926
5927@emph{Pragmatics: The core of @value{GDBN} must be buildable on many
5928platforms including DJGPP and MacOS/HFS.  Every time an unfriendly file
5929is introduced to the build process both @file{Makefile.in} and
5930@file{configure.in} need to be modified accordingly.  Compare the
5931convoluted conversion process needed to transform @file{COPYING} into
5932@file{copying.c} with the conversion needed to transform
5933@file{version.in} into @file{version.c}.}
5934
5935Any file non 8.3 compliant file (that is not used when building the core
5936of @value{GDBN}) must be added to @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
5937
5938@emph{Pragmatics: This is clearly a compromise.}
5939
5940When @value{GDBN} has a local version of a system header file (ex
5941@file{string.h}) the file name based on the POSIX header prefixed with
5942@file{gdb_} (@file{gdb_string.h}).  These headers should be relatively
5943independent: they should use only macros defined by @file{configure},
5944the compiler, or the host; they should include only system headers; they
5945should refer only to system types.  They may be shared between multiple
5946programs, e.g.@: @value{GDBN} and @sc{gdbserver}.
5947
5948For other files @samp{-} is used as the separator.
5949
5950@subsection Include Files
5951
5952A @file{.c} file should include @file{defs.h} first.
5953
5954A @file{.c} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
5955declaration and/or definition it directly refers to.  It cannot rely on
5956indirect inclusion.
5957
5958A @file{.h} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
5959declaration and/or definition it directly refers to.  It cannot rely on
5960indirect inclusion.  Exception: The file @file{defs.h} does not need to
5961be directly included.
5962
5963An external declaration should only appear in one include file.
5964
5965An external declaration should never appear in a @code{.c} file.
5966Exception: a declaration for the @code{_initialize} function that
5967pacifies @option{-Wmissing-declaration}.
5968
5969A @code{typedef} definition should only appear in one include file.
5970
5971An opaque @code{struct} declaration can appear in multiple @file{.h}
5972files.  Where possible, a @file{.h} file should use an opaque
5973@code{struct} declaration instead of an include.
5974
5975All @file{.h} files should be wrapped in:
5976
5977@smallexample
5978#ifndef INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
5979#define INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
5980header body
5981#endif
5982@end smallexample
5983
5984@section @value{GDBN} Python Coding Standards
5985
5986@value{GDBN} follows the published @code{Python} coding standards in
5987@uref{http://www.python.org/dev/peps/pep-0008/, @code{PEP008}}.
5988
5989In addition, the guidelines in the
5990@uref{http://google-styleguide.googlecode.com/svn/trunk/pyguide.html,
5991Google Python Style Guide} are also followed where they do not
5992conflict with @code{PEP008}.
5993
5994@subsection @value{GDBN}-specific exceptions
5995
5996There are a few exceptions to the published standards.
5997They exist mainly for consistency with the @code{C} standards.
5998
5999@c It is expected that there are a few more exceptions,
6000@c so we use itemize here.
6001
6002@itemize @bullet
6003
6004@item
6005Use @code{FIXME} instead of @code{TODO}.
6006
6007@end itemize
6008
6009@node Misc Guidelines
6010
6011@chapter Misc Guidelines
6012
6013This chapter covers topics that are lower-level than the major
6014algorithms of @value{GDBN}.
6015
6016@section Cleanups
6017@cindex cleanups
6018
6019Cleanups are a structured way to deal with things that need to be done
6020later.
6021
6022When your code does something (e.g., @code{xmalloc} some memory, or
6023@code{open} a file) that needs to be undone later (e.g., @code{xfree}
6024the memory or @code{close} the file), it can make a cleanup.  The
6025cleanup will be done at some future point: when the command is finished
6026and control returns to the top level; when an error occurs and the stack
6027is unwound; or when your code decides it's time to explicitly perform
6028cleanups.  Alternatively you can elect to discard the cleanups you
6029created.
6030
6031Syntax:
6032
6033@table @code
6034@item struct cleanup *@var{old_chain};
6035Declare a variable which will hold a cleanup chain handle.
6036
6037@findex make_cleanup
6038@item @var{old_chain} = make_cleanup (@var{function}, @var{arg});
6039Make a cleanup which will cause @var{function} to be called with
6040@var{arg} (a @code{char *}) later.  The result, @var{old_chain}, is a
6041handle that can later be passed to @code{do_cleanups} or
6042@code{discard_cleanups}.  Unless you are going to call
6043@code{do_cleanups} or @code{discard_cleanups}, you can ignore the result
6044from @code{make_cleanup}.
6045
6046@findex do_cleanups
6047@item do_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
6048Do all cleanups added to the chain since the corresponding
6049@code{make_cleanup} call was made.
6050
6051@findex discard_cleanups
6052@item discard_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
6053Same as @code{do_cleanups} except that it just removes the cleanups from
6054the chain and does not call the specified functions.
6055@end table
6056
6057Cleanups are implemented as a chain.  The handle returned by
6058@code{make_cleanups} includes the cleanup passed to the call and any
6059later cleanups appended to the chain (but not yet discarded or
6060performed).  E.g.:
6061
6062@smallexample
6063make_cleanup (a, 0);
6064@{
6065  struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (b, 0);
6066  make_cleanup (c, 0)
6067  ...
6068  do_cleanups (old);
6069@}
6070@end smallexample
6071
6072@noindent
6073will call @code{c()} and @code{b()} but will not call @code{a()}.  The
6074cleanup that calls @code{a()} will remain in the cleanup chain, and will
6075be done later unless otherwise discarded.@refill
6076
6077Your function should explicitly do or discard the cleanups it creates.
6078Failing to do this leads to non-deterministic behavior since the caller
6079will arbitrarily do or discard your functions cleanups.  This need leads
6080to two common cleanup styles.
6081
6082The first style is try/finally.  Before it exits, your code-block calls
6083@code{do_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that your
6084code-block's cleanups are always performed.  For instance, the following
6085code-segment avoids a memory leak problem (even when @code{error} is
6086called and a forced stack unwind occurs) by ensuring that the
6087@code{xfree} will always be called:
6088
6089@smallexample
6090struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (null_cleanup, 0);
6091data = xmalloc (sizeof blah);
6092make_cleanup (xfree, data);
6093... blah blah ...
6094do_cleanups (old);
6095@end smallexample
6096
6097The second style is try/except.  Before it exits, your code-block calls
6098@code{discard_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that
6099any created cleanups are not performed.  For instance, the following
6100code segment, ensures that the file will be closed but only if there is
6101an error:
6102
6103@smallexample
6104FILE *file = fopen ("afile", "r");
6105struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (close_file, file);
6106... blah blah ...
6107discard_cleanups (old);
6108return file;
6109@end smallexample
6110
6111Some functions, e.g., @code{fputs_filtered()} or @code{error()}, specify
6112that they ``should not be called when cleanups are not in place''.  This
6113means that any actions you need to reverse in the case of an error or
6114interruption must be on the cleanup chain before you call these
6115functions, since they might never return to your code (they
6116@samp{longjmp} instead).
6117
6118@section Per-architecture module data
6119@cindex per-architecture module data
6120@cindex multi-arch data
6121@cindex data-pointer, per-architecture/per-module
6122
6123The multi-arch framework includes a mechanism for adding module
6124specific per-architecture data-pointers to the @code{struct gdbarch}
6125architecture object.
6126
6127A module registers one or more per-architecture data-pointers using:
6128
6129@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct gdbarch_data *} gdbarch_data_register_pre_init (gdbarch_data_pre_init_ftype *@var{pre_init})
6130@var{pre_init} is used to, on-demand, allocate an initial value for a
6131per-architecture data-pointer using the architecture's obstack (passed
6132in as a parameter).  Since @var{pre_init} can be called during
6133architecture creation, it is not parameterized with the architecture.
6134and must not call modules that use per-architecture data.
6135@end deftypefn
6136
6137@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct gdbarch_data *} gdbarch_data_register_post_init (gdbarch_data_post_init_ftype *@var{post_init})
6138@var{post_init} is used to obtain an initial value for a
6139per-architecture data-pointer @emph{after}.  Since @var{post_init} is
6140always called after architecture creation, it both receives the fully
6141initialized architecture and is free to call modules that use
6142per-architecture data (care needs to be taken to ensure that those
6143other modules do not try to call back to this module as that will
6144create in cycles in the initialization call graph).
6145@end deftypefn
6146
6147These functions return a @code{struct gdbarch_data} that is used to
6148identify the per-architecture data-pointer added for that module.
6149
6150The per-architecture data-pointer is accessed using the function:
6151
6152@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {void *} gdbarch_data (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct gdbarch_data *@var{data_handle})
6153Given the architecture @var{arch} and module data handle
6154@var{data_handle} (returned by @code{gdbarch_data_register_pre_init}
6155or @code{gdbarch_data_register_post_init}), this function returns the
6156current value of the per-architecture data-pointer.  If the data
6157pointer is @code{NULL}, it is first initialized by calling the
6158corresponding @var{pre_init} or @var{post_init} method.
6159@end deftypefn
6160
6161The examples below assume the following definitions:
6162
6163@smallexample
6164struct nozel @{ int total; @};
6165static struct gdbarch_data *nozel_handle;
6166@end smallexample
6167
6168A module can extend the architecture vector, adding additional
6169per-architecture data, using the @var{pre_init} method.  The module's
6170per-architecture data is then initialized during architecture
6171creation.
6172
6173In the below, the module's per-architecture @emph{nozel} is added.  An
6174architecture can specify its nozel by calling @code{set_gdbarch_nozel}
6175from @code{gdbarch_init}.
6176
6177@smallexample
6178static void *
6179nozel_pre_init (struct obstack *obstack)
6180@{
6181  struct nozel *data = OBSTACK_ZALLOC (obstack, struct nozel);
6182  return data;
6183@}
6184@end smallexample
6185
6186@smallexample
6187extern void
6188set_gdbarch_nozel (struct gdbarch *gdbarch, int total)
6189@{
6190  struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
6191  data->total = nozel;
6192@}
6193@end smallexample
6194
6195A module can on-demand create architecture dependent data structures
6196using @code{post_init}.
6197
6198In the below, the nozel's total is computed on-demand by
6199@code{nozel_post_init} using information obtained from the
6200architecture.
6201
6202@smallexample
6203static void *
6204nozel_post_init (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
6205@{
6206  struct nozel *data = GDBARCH_OBSTACK_ZALLOC (gdbarch, struct nozel);
6207  nozel->total = gdbarch@dots{} (gdbarch);
6208  return data;
6209@}
6210@end smallexample
6211
6212@smallexample
6213extern int
6214nozel_total (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
6215@{
6216  struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
6217  return data->total;
6218@}
6219@end smallexample
6220
6221@section Wrapping Output Lines
6222@cindex line wrap in output
6223
6224@findex wrap_here
6225Output that goes through @code{printf_filtered} or @code{fputs_filtered}
6226or @code{fputs_demangled} needs only to have calls to @code{wrap_here}
6227added in places that would be good breaking points.  The utility
6228routines will take care of actually wrapping if the line width is
6229exceeded.
6230
6231The argument to @code{wrap_here} is an indentation string which is
6232printed @emph{only} if the line breaks there.  This argument is saved
6233away and used later.  It must remain valid until the next call to
6234@code{wrap_here} or until a newline has been printed through the
6235@code{*_filtered} functions.  Don't pass in a local variable and then
6236return!
6237
6238It is usually best to call @code{wrap_here} after printing a comma or
6239space.  If you call it before printing a space, make sure that your
6240indentation properly accounts for the leading space that will print if
6241the line wraps there.
6242
6243Any function or set of functions that produce filtered output must
6244finish by printing a newline, to flush the wrap buffer, before switching
6245to unfiltered (@code{printf}) output.  Symbol reading routines that
6246print warnings are a good example.
6247
6248@section Memory Management
6249
6250@value{GDBN} does not use the functions @code{malloc}, @code{realloc},
6251@code{calloc}, @code{free} and @code{asprintf}.
6252
6253@value{GDBN} uses the functions @code{xmalloc}, @code{xrealloc} and
6254@code{xcalloc} when allocating memory.  Unlike @code{malloc} et.al.@:
6255these functions do not return when the memory pool is empty.  Instead,
6256they unwind the stack using cleanups.  These functions return
6257@code{NULL} when requested to allocate a chunk of memory of size zero.
6258
6259@emph{Pragmatics: By using these functions, the need to check every
6260memory allocation is removed.  These functions provide portable
6261behavior.}
6262
6263@value{GDBN} does not use the function @code{free}.
6264
6265@value{GDBN} uses the function @code{xfree} to return memory to the
6266memory pool.  Consistent with ISO-C, this function ignores a request to
6267free a @code{NULL} pointer.
6268
6269@emph{Pragmatics: On some systems @code{free} fails when passed a
6270@code{NULL} pointer.}
6271
6272@value{GDBN} can use the non-portable function @code{alloca} for the
6273allocation of small temporary values (such as strings).
6274
6275@emph{Pragmatics: This function is very non-portable.  Some systems
6276restrict the memory being allocated to no more than a few kilobytes.}
6277
6278@value{GDBN} uses the string function @code{xstrdup} and the print
6279function @code{xstrprintf}.
6280
6281@emph{Pragmatics: @code{asprintf} and @code{strdup} can fail.  Print
6282functions such as @code{sprintf} are very prone to buffer overflow
6283errors.}
6284
6285
6286@section Compiler Warnings
6287@cindex compiler warnings
6288
6289With few exceptions, developers should avoid the configuration option
6290@samp{--disable-werror} when building @value{GDBN}.  The exceptions
6291are listed in the file @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}.  The default, when
6292building with @sc{gcc}, is @samp{--enable-werror}.
6293
6294This option causes @value{GDBN} (when built using GCC) to be compiled
6295with a carefully selected list of compiler warning flags.  Any warnings
6296from those flags are treated as errors.
6297
6298The current list of warning flags includes:
6299
6300@table @samp
6301@item -Wall
6302Recommended @sc{gcc} warnings.
6303
6304@item -Wdeclaration-after-statement
6305
6306@sc{gcc} 3.x (and later) and @sc{c99} allow declarations mixed with
6307code, but @sc{gcc} 2.x and @sc{c89} do not.
6308
6309@item -Wpointer-arith
6310
6311@item -Wformat-nonliteral
6312Non-literal format strings, with a few exceptions, are bugs - they
6313might contain unintended user-supplied format specifiers.
6314Since @value{GDBN} uses the @code{format printf} attribute on all
6315@code{printf} like functions this checks not just @code{printf} calls
6316but also calls to functions such as @code{fprintf_unfiltered}.
6317
6318@item -Wno-pointer-sign
6319In version 4.0, GCC began warning about pointer argument passing or
6320assignment even when the source and destination differed only in
6321signedness.  However, most @value{GDBN} code doesn't distinguish
6322carefully between @code{char} and @code{unsigned char}.  In early 2006
6323the @value{GDBN} developers decided correcting these warnings wasn't
6324worth the time it would take.
6325
6326@item -Wno-unused-parameter
6327Due to the way that @value{GDBN} is implemented many functions have
6328unused parameters.  Consequently this warning is avoided.  The macro
6329@code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} is not used as it leads to false negatives ---
6330it is not an error to have @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} on a parameter that
6331is being used.
6332
6333@item -Wno-unused
6334@itemx -Wno-switch
6335@itemx -Wno-char-subscripts
6336These are warnings which might be useful for @value{GDBN}, but are
6337currently too noisy to enable with @samp{-Werror}.
6338
6339@end table
6340
6341@section Internal Error Recovery
6342
6343During its execution, @value{GDBN} can encounter two types of errors.
6344User errors and internal errors.  User errors include not only a user
6345entering an incorrect command but also problems arising from corrupt
6346object files and system errors when interacting with the target.
6347Internal errors include situations where @value{GDBN} has detected, at
6348run time, a corrupt or erroneous situation.
6349
6350When reporting an internal error, @value{GDBN} uses
6351@code{internal_error} and @code{gdb_assert}.
6352
6353@value{GDBN} must not call @code{abort} or @code{assert}.
6354
6355@emph{Pragmatics: There is no @code{internal_warning} function.  Either
6356the code detected a user error, recovered from it and issued a
6357@code{warning} or the code failed to correctly recover from the user
6358error and issued an @code{internal_error}.}
6359
6360@section Command Names
6361
6362GDB U/I commands are written @samp{foo-bar}, not @samp{foo_bar}.
6363
6364@section Clean Design and Portable Implementation
6365
6366@cindex design
6367In addition to getting the syntax right, there's the little question of
6368semantics.  Some things are done in certain ways in @value{GDBN} because long
6369experience has shown that the more obvious ways caused various kinds of
6370trouble.
6371
6372@cindex assumptions about targets
6373You can't assume the byte order of anything that comes from a target
6374(including @var{value}s, object files, and instructions).  Such things
6375must be byte-swapped using @code{SWAP_TARGET_AND_HOST} in
6376@value{GDBN}, or one of the swap routines defined in @file{bfd.h},
6377such as @code{bfd_get_32}.
6378
6379You can't assume that you know what interface is being used to talk to
6380the target system.  All references to the target must go through the
6381current @code{target_ops} vector.
6382
6383You can't assume that the host and target machines are the same machine
6384(except in the ``native'' support modules).  In particular, you can't
6385assume that the target machine's header files will be available on the
6386host machine.  Target code must bring along its own header files --
6387written from scratch or explicitly donated by their owner, to avoid
6388copyright problems.
6389
6390@cindex portability
6391Insertion of new @code{#ifdef}'s will be frowned upon.  It's much better
6392to write the code portably than to conditionalize it for various
6393systems.
6394
6395@cindex system dependencies
6396New @code{#ifdef}'s which test for specific compilers or manufacturers
6397or operating systems are unacceptable.  All @code{#ifdef}'s should test
6398for features.  The information about which configurations contain which
6399features should be segregated into the configuration files.  Experience
6400has proven far too often that a feature unique to one particular system
6401often creeps into other systems; and that a conditional based on some
6402predefined macro for your current system will become worthless over
6403time, as new versions of your system come out that behave differently
6404with regard to this feature.
6405
6406Adding code that handles specific architectures, operating systems,
6407target interfaces, or hosts, is not acceptable in generic code.
6408
6409@cindex portable file name handling
6410@cindex file names, portability
6411One particularly notorious area where system dependencies tend to
6412creep in is handling of file names.  The mainline @value{GDBN} code
6413assumes Posix semantics of file names: absolute file names begin with
6414a forward slash @file{/}, slashes are used to separate leading
6415directories, case-sensitive file names.  These assumptions are not
6416necessarily true on non-Posix systems such as MS-Windows.  To avoid
6417system-dependent code where you need to take apart or construct a file
6418name, use the following portable macros:
6419
6420@table @code
6421@findex HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
6422@item HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
6423This preprocessing symbol is defined to a non-zero value on hosts
6424whose filesystems belong to the MS-DOS/MS-Windows family.  Use this
6425symbol to write conditional code which should only be compiled for
6426such hosts.
6427
6428@findex IS_DIR_SEPARATOR
6429@item IS_DIR_SEPARATOR (@var{c})
6430Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{c} is a directory separator
6431character.  On Unix and GNU/Linux systems, only a slash @file{/} is
6432such a character, but on Windows, both @file{/} and @file{\} will
6433pass.
6434
6435@findex IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH
6436@item IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (@var{file})
6437Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{file} is an absolute file name.
6438For Unix and GNU/Linux hosts, a name which begins with a slash
6439@file{/} is absolute.  On DOS and Windows, @file{d:/foo} and
6440@file{x:\bar} are also absolute file names.
6441
6442@findex FILENAME_CMP
6443@item FILENAME_CMP (@var{f1}, @var{f2})
6444Calls a function which compares file names @var{f1} and @var{f2} as
6445appropriate for the underlying host filesystem.  For Posix systems,
6446this simply calls @code{strcmp}; on case-insensitive filesystems it
6447will call @code{strcasecmp} instead.
6448
6449@findex DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
6450@item DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
6451Evaluates to a character which separates directories in
6452@code{PATH}-style lists, typically held in environment variables.
6453This character is @samp{:} on Unix, @samp{;} on DOS and Windows.
6454
6455@findex SLASH_STRING
6456@item SLASH_STRING
6457This evaluates to a constant string you should use to produce an
6458absolute filename from leading directories and the file's basename.
6459@code{SLASH_STRING} is @code{"/"} on most systems, but might be
6460@code{"\\"} for some Windows-based ports.
6461@end table
6462
6463In addition to using these macros, be sure to use portable library
6464functions whenever possible.  For example, to extract a directory or a
6465basename part from a file name, use the @code{dirname} and
6466@code{basename} library functions (available in @code{libiberty} for
6467platforms which don't provide them), instead of searching for a slash
6468with @code{strrchr}.
6469
6470Another way to generalize @value{GDBN} along a particular interface is with an
6471attribute struct.  For example, @value{GDBN} has been generalized to handle
6472multiple kinds of remote interfaces---not by @code{#ifdef}s everywhere, but
6473by defining the @code{target_ops} structure and having a current target (as
6474well as a stack of targets below it, for memory references).  Whenever
6475something needs to be done that depends on which remote interface we are
6476using, a flag in the current target_ops structure is tested (e.g.,
6477@code{target_has_stack}), or a function is called through a pointer in the
6478current target_ops structure.  In this way, when a new remote interface
6479is added, only one module needs to be touched---the one that actually
6480implements the new remote interface.  Other examples of
6481attribute-structs are BFD access to multiple kinds of object file
6482formats, or @value{GDBN}'s access to multiple source languages.
6483
6484Please avoid duplicating code.  For example, in @value{GDBN} 3.x all
6485the code interfacing between @code{ptrace} and the rest of
6486@value{GDBN} was duplicated in @file{*-dep.c}, and so changing
6487something was very painful.  In @value{GDBN} 4.x, these have all been
6488consolidated into @file{infptrace.c}.  @file{infptrace.c} can deal
6489with variations between systems the same way any system-independent
6490file would (hooks, @code{#if defined}, etc.), and machines which are
6491radically different don't need to use @file{infptrace.c} at all.
6492
6493All debugging code must be controllable using the @samp{set debug
6494@var{module}} command.  Do not use @code{printf} to print trace
6495messages.  Use @code{fprintf_unfiltered(gdb_stdlog, ...}.  Do not use
6496@code{#ifdef DEBUG}.
6497
6498@node Porting GDB
6499
6500@chapter Porting @value{GDBN}
6501@cindex porting to new machines
6502
6503Most of the work in making @value{GDBN} compile on a new machine is in
6504specifying the configuration of the machine.  Porting a new
6505architecture to @value{GDBN} can be broken into a number of steps.
6506
6507@itemize @bullet
6508
6509@item
6510Ensure a @sc{bfd} exists for executables of the target architecture in
6511the @file{bfd} directory.  If one does not exist, create one by
6512modifying an existing similar one.
6513
6514@item
6515Implement a disassembler for the target architecture in the @file{opcodes}
6516directory.
6517
6518@item
6519Define the target architecture in the @file{gdb} directory
6520(@pxref{Adding a New Target, , Adding a New Target}).  Add the pattern
6521for the new target to @file{configure.tgt} with the names of the files
6522that contain the code.  By convention the target architecture
6523definition for an architecture @var{arch} is placed in
6524@file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}.
6525
6526Within @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c} define the function
6527@code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} which calls
6528@code{gdbarch_register} to create the new @code{@w{struct
6529gdbarch}} for the architecture.
6530
6531@item
6532If a new remote target is needed, consider adding a new remote target
6533by defining a function
6534@code{_initialize_remote_@var{arch}}.  However if at all possible
6535use the @value{GDBN} @emph{Remote Serial Protocol} for this and implement
6536the server side protocol independently with the target.
6537
6538@item
6539If desired implement a simulator in the @file{sim} directory.  This
6540should create the library @file{libsim.a} implementing the interface
6541in @file{remote-sim.h} (found in the @file{include} directory).
6542
6543@item
6544Build and test.  If desired, lobby the @sc{gdb} steering group to
6545have the new port included in the main distribution!
6546
6547@item
6548Add a description of the new architecture to the main @value{GDBN} user
6549guide (@pxref{Configuration Specific Information, , Configuration
6550Specific Information, gdb, Debugging with @value{GDBN}}).
6551
6552@end itemize
6553
6554@node Versions and Branches
6555@chapter Versions and Branches
6556
6557@section Versions
6558
6559@value{GDBN}'s version is determined by the file
6560@file{gdb/version.in} and takes one of the following forms:
6561
6562@table @asis
6563@item @var{major}.@var{minor}
6564@itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}
6565an official release (e.g., 6.2 or 6.2.1)
6566@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6567a snapshot taken at @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD}-gmt (e.g.,
65686.1.50.20020302, 6.1.90.20020304, or 6.1.0.20020308)
6569@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-cvs
6570a @sc{cvs} check out drawn on @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD} (e.g.,
65716.1.50.20020302-cvs, 6.1.90.20020304-cvs, or 6.1.0.20020308-cvs)
6572@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} (@var{vendor})
6573a vendor specific release of @value{GDBN}, that while based on@*
6574@var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD},
6575may include additional changes
6576@end table
6577
6578@value{GDBN}'s mainline uses the @var{major} and @var{minor} version
6579numbers from the most recent release branch, with a @var{patchlevel}
6580of 50.  At the time each new release branch is created, the mainline's
6581@var{major} and @var{minor} version numbers are updated.
6582
6583@value{GDBN}'s release branch is similar.  When the branch is cut, the
6584@var{patchlevel} is changed from 50 to 90.  As draft releases are
6585drawn from the branch, the @var{patchlevel} is incremented.  Once the
6586first release (@var{major}.@var{minor}) has been made, the
6587@var{patchlevel} is set to 0 and updates have an incremented
6588@var{patchlevel}.
6589
6590For snapshots, and @sc{cvs} check outs, it is also possible to
6591identify the @sc{cvs} origin:
6592
6593@table @asis
6594@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.50.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6595drawn from the @sc{head} of mainline @sc{cvs} (e.g., 6.1.50.20020302)
6596@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.90.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6597@itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.91.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
6598drawn from a release branch prior to the release (e.g.,
65996.1.90.20020304)
6600@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.0.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6601@itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.1.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
6602drawn from a release branch after the release (e.g., 6.2.0.20020308)
6603@end table
6604
6605If the previous @value{GDBN} version is 6.1 and the current version is
66066.2, then, substituting 6 for @var{major} and 1 or 2 for @var{minor},
6607here's an illustration of a typical sequence:
6608
6609@smallexample
6610     <HEAD>
6611        |
66126.1.50.20020302-cvs
6613        |
6614        +--------------------------.
6615        |                    <gdb_6_2-branch>
6616        |                          |
66176.2.50.20020303-cvs        6.1.90 (draft #1)
6618        |                          |
66196.2.50.20020304-cvs        6.1.90.20020304-cvs
6620        |                          |
66216.2.50.20020305-cvs        6.1.91 (draft #2)
6622        |                          |
66236.2.50.20020306-cvs        6.1.91.20020306-cvs
6624        |                          |
66256.2.50.20020307-cvs        6.2 (release)
6626        |                          |
66276.2.50.20020308-cvs        6.2.0.20020308-cvs
6628        |                          |
66296.2.50.20020309-cvs        6.2.1 (update)
6630        |                          |
66316.2.50.20020310-cvs         <branch closed>
6632        |
66336.2.50.20020311-cvs
6634        |
6635        +--------------------------.
6636        |                     <gdb_6_3-branch>
6637        |                          |
66386.3.50.20020312-cvs        6.2.90 (draft #1)
6639        |                          |
6640@end smallexample
6641
6642@section Release Branches
6643@cindex Release Branches
6644
6645@value{GDBN} draws a release series (6.2, 6.2.1, @dots{}) from a
6646single release branch, and identifies that branch using the @sc{cvs}
6647branch tags:
6648
6649@smallexample
6650gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-branchpoint
6651gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-branch
6652gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-release
6653@end smallexample
6654
6655@emph{Pragmatics: To help identify the date at which a branch or
6656release is made, both the branchpoint and release tags include the
6657date that they are cut (@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}) in the tag.  The
6658branch tag, denoting the head of the branch, does not need this.}
6659
6660@section Vendor Branches
6661@cindex vendor branches
6662
6663To avoid version conflicts, vendors are expected to modify the file
6664@file{gdb/version.in} to include a vendor unique alphabetic identifier
6665(an official @value{GDBN} release never uses alphabetic characters in
6666its version identifier).  E.g., @samp{6.2widgit2}, or @samp{6.2 (Widgit
6667Inc Patch 2)}.
6668
6669@section Experimental Branches
6670@cindex experimental branches
6671
6672@subsection Guidelines
6673
6674@value{GDBN} permits the creation of branches, cut from the @sc{cvs}
6675repository, for experimental development.  Branches make it possible
6676for developers to share preliminary work, and maintainers to examine
6677significant new developments.
6678
6679The following are a set of guidelines for creating such branches:
6680
6681@table @emph
6682
6683@item a branch has an owner
6684The owner can set further policy for a branch, but may not change the
6685ground rules.  In particular, they can set a policy for commits (be it
6686adding more reviewers or deciding who can commit).
6687
6688@item all commits are posted
6689All changes committed to a branch shall also be posted to
6690@email{gdb-patches@@sourceware.org, the @value{GDBN} patches
6691mailing list}.  While commentary on such changes are encouraged, people
6692should remember that the changes only apply to a branch.
6693
6694@item all commits are covered by an assignment
6695This ensures that all changes belong to the Free Software Foundation,
6696and avoids the possibility that the branch may become contaminated.
6697
6698@item a branch is focused
6699A focused branch has a single objective or goal, and does not contain
6700unnecessary or irrelevant changes.  Cleanups, where identified, being
6701be pushed into the mainline as soon as possible.
6702
6703@item a branch tracks mainline
6704This keeps the level of divergence under control.  It also keeps the
6705pressure on developers to push cleanups and other stuff into the
6706mainline.
6707
6708@item a branch shall contain the entire @value{GDBN} module
6709The @value{GDBN} module @code{gdb} should be specified when creating a
6710branch (branches of individual files should be avoided).  @xref{Tags}.
6711
6712@item a branch shall be branded using @file{version.in}
6713The file @file{gdb/version.in} shall be modified so that it identifies
6714the branch @var{owner} and branch @var{name}, e.g.,
6715@samp{6.2.50.20030303_owner_name} or @samp{6.2 (Owner Name)}.
6716
6717@end table
6718
6719@subsection Tags
6720@anchor{Tags}
6721
6722To simplify the identification of @value{GDBN} branches, the following
6723branch tagging convention is strongly recommended:
6724
6725@table @code
6726
6727@item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
6728@itemx @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch
6729The branch point and corresponding branch tag.  @var{YYYYMMDD} is the
6730date that the branch was created.  A branch is created using the
6731sequence: @anchor{experimental branch tags}
6732@smallexample
6733cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint gdb
6734cvs rtag -b -r @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint \
6735   @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch gdb
6736@end smallexample
6737
6738@item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
6739The tagged point, on the mainline, that was used when merging the branch
6740on @var{yyyymmdd}.  To merge in all changes since the branch was cut,
6741use a command sequence like:
6742@smallexample
6743cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint gdb
6744cvs update \
6745   -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
6746   -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
6747@end smallexample
6748@noindent
6749Similar sequences can be used to just merge in changes since the last
6750merge.
6751
6752@end table
6753
6754@noindent
6755For further information on @sc{cvs}, see
6756@uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/cvs/, Concurrent Versions System}.
6757
6758@node Start of New Year Procedure
6759@chapter Start of New Year Procedure
6760@cindex new year procedure
6761
6762At the start of each new year, the following actions should be performed:
6763
6764@itemize @bullet
6765@item
6766Rotate the ChangeLog file
6767
6768The current @file{ChangeLog} file should be renamed into
6769@file{ChangeLog-YYYY} where YYYY is the year that has just passed.
6770A new @file{ChangeLog} file should be created, and its contents should
6771contain a reference to the previous ChangeLog.  The following should
6772also be preserved at the end of the new ChangeLog, in order to provide
6773the appropriate settings when editing this file with Emacs:
6774@smallexample
6775Local Variables:
6776mode: change-log
6777left-margin: 8
6778fill-column: 74
6779version-control: never
6780coding: utf-8
6781End:
6782@end smallexample
6783
6784@item
6785Add an entry for the newly created ChangeLog file (@file{ChangeLog-YYYY})
6786in @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
6787
6788@item
6789Update the copyright year in the startup message
6790
6791Update the copyright year in:
6792@itemize @bullet
6793  @item
6794  file @file{top.c}, function @code{print_gdb_version}
6795  @item
6796  file @file{gdbserver/server.c}, function @code{gdbserver_version}
6797  @item
6798  file @file{gdbserver/gdbreplay.c}, function @code{gdbreplay_version}
6799@end itemize
6800
6801@item
6802Run the @file{copyright.sh} script to add the new year in the copyright
6803notices of most source files.  This script requires Emacs 22 or later to
6804be installed.
6805
6806@item
6807The new year also needs to be added manually in all other files that
6808are not already taken care of by the @file{copyright.sh} script:
6809@itemize @bullet
6810  @item
6811  @file{*.s}
6812  @item
6813  @file{*.f}
6814  @item
6815  @file{*.f90}
6816  @item
6817  @file{*.igen}
6818  @item
6819  @file{*.ac}
6820  @item
6821  @file{*.texi}
6822  @item
6823  @file{*.texinfo}
6824  @item
6825  @file{*.tex}
6826  @item
6827  @file{*.defs}
6828  @item
6829  @file{*.1}
6830@end itemize
6831
6832@end itemize
6833
6834@node Releasing GDB
6835
6836@chapter Releasing @value{GDBN}
6837@cindex making a new release of gdb
6838
6839@section Branch Commit Policy
6840
6841The branch commit policy is pretty slack.  @value{GDBN} releases 5.0,
68425.1 and 5.2 all used the below:
6843
6844@itemize @bullet
6845@item
6846The @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS} file still holds.
6847@item
6848Don't fix something on the branch unless/until it is also fixed in the
6849trunk.  If this isn't possible, mentioning it in the @file{gdb/PROBLEMS}
6850file is better than committing a hack.
6851@item
6852When considering a patch for the branch, suggested criteria include:
6853Does it fix a build?  Does it fix the sequence @kbd{break main; run}
6854when debugging a static binary?
6855@item
6856The further a change is from the core of @value{GDBN}, the less likely
6857the change will worry anyone (e.g., target specific code).
6858@item
6859Only post a proposal to change the core of @value{GDBN} after you've
6860sent individual bribes to all the people listed in the
6861@file{MAINTAINERS} file @t{;-)}
6862@end itemize
6863
6864@emph{Pragmatics: Provided updates are restricted to non-core
6865functionality there is little chance that a broken change will be fatal.
6866This means that changes such as adding a new architectures or (within
6867reason) support for a new host are considered acceptable.}
6868
6869
6870@section Obsoleting code
6871
6872Before anything else, poke the other developers (and around the source
6873code) to see if there is anything that can be removed from @value{GDBN}
6874(an old target, an unused file).
6875
6876Obsolete code is identified by adding an @code{OBSOLETE} prefix to every
6877line.  Doing this means that it is easy to identify something that has
6878been obsoleted when greping through the sources.
6879
6880The process is done in stages --- this is mainly to ensure that the
6881wider @value{GDBN} community has a reasonable opportunity to respond.
6882Remember, everything on the Internet takes a week.
6883
6884@enumerate
6885@item
6886Post the proposal on @email{gdb@@sourceware.org, the GDB mailing
6887list} Creating a bug report to track the task's state, is also highly
6888recommended.
6889@item
6890Wait a week or so.
6891@item
6892Post the proposal on @email{gdb-announce@@sourceware.org, the GDB
6893Announcement mailing list}.
6894@item
6895Wait a week or so.
6896@item
6897Go through and edit all relevant files and lines so that they are
6898prefixed with the word @code{OBSOLETE}.
6899@item
6900Wait until the next GDB version, containing this obsolete code, has been
6901released.
6902@item
6903Remove the obsolete code.
6904@end enumerate
6905
6906@noindent
6907@emph{Maintainer note: While removing old code is regrettable it is
6908hopefully better for @value{GDBN}'s long term development.  Firstly it
6909helps the developers by removing code that is either no longer relevant
6910or simply wrong.  Secondly since it removes any history associated with
6911the file (effectively clearing the slate) the developer has a much freer
6912hand when it comes to fixing broken files.}
6913
6914
6915
6916@section Before the Branch
6917
6918The most important objective at this stage is to find and fix simple
6919changes that become a pain to track once the branch is created.  For
6920instance, configuration problems that stop @value{GDBN} from even
6921building.  If you can't get the problem fixed, document it in the
6922@file{gdb/PROBLEMS} file.
6923
6924@subheading Prompt for @file{gdb/NEWS}
6925
6926People always forget.  Send a post reminding them but also if you know
6927something interesting happened add it yourself.  The @code{schedule}
6928script will mention this in its e-mail.
6929
6930@subheading Review @file{gdb/README}
6931
6932Grab one of the nightly snapshots and then walk through the
6933@file{gdb/README} looking for anything that can be improved.  The
6934@code{schedule} script will mention this in its e-mail.
6935
6936@subheading Refresh any imported files.
6937
6938A number of files are taken from external repositories.  They include:
6939
6940@itemize @bullet
6941@item
6942@file{texinfo/texinfo.tex}
6943@item
6944@file{config.guess} et.@: al.@: (see the top-level @file{MAINTAINERS}
6945file)
6946@item
6947@file{etc/standards.texi}, @file{etc/make-stds.texi}
6948@end itemize
6949
6950@subheading Check the ARI
6951
6952@uref{http://sourceware.org/gdb/ari,,A.R.I.} is an @code{awk} script
6953(Awk Regression Index ;-) that checks for a number of errors and coding
6954conventions.  The checks include things like using @code{malloc} instead
6955of @code{xmalloc} and file naming problems.  There shouldn't be any
6956regressions.
6957
6958@subsection Review the bug data base
6959
6960Close anything obviously fixed.
6961
6962@subsection Check all cross targets build
6963
6964The targets are listed in @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}.
6965
6966
6967@section Cut the Branch
6968
6969@subheading Create the branch
6970
6971@smallexample
6972$  u=5.1
6973$  v=5.2
6974$  V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6975$  D=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6976$  echo $u $V $D
69775.1 5_2 2002-03-03
6978$  echo cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src rtag \
6979-D $D-gmt gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint insight
6980cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src rtag
6981-D 2002-03-03-gmt gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint insight
6982$  ^echo ^^
6983...
6984$  echo cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src rtag \
6985-b -r gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint gdb_$V-branch insight
6986cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src rtag \
6987-b -r gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint gdb_5_2-branch insight
6988$  ^echo ^^
6989...
6990$
6991@end smallexample
6992
6993@itemize @bullet
6994@item
6995By using @kbd{-D YYYY-MM-DD-gmt}, the branch is forced to an exact
6996date/time.
6997@item
6998The trunk is first tagged so that the branch point can easily be found.
6999@item
7000Insight, which includes @value{GDBN}, is tagged at the same time.
7001@item
7002@file{version.in} gets bumped to avoid version number conflicts.
7003@item
7004The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled using @file{-f}.
7005@end itemize
7006
7007@subheading Update @file{version.in}
7008
7009@smallexample
7010$  u=5.1
7011$  v=5.2
7012$  V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
7013$  echo $u $v$V
70145.1 5_2
7015$  cd /tmp
7016$  echo cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src co \
7017-r gdb_$V-branch src/gdb/version.in
7018cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src co
7019 -r gdb_5_2-branch src/gdb/version.in
7020$  ^echo ^^
7021U src/gdb/version.in
7022$  cd src/gdb
7023$  echo $u.90-0000-00-00-cvs > version.in
7024$  cat version.in
70255.1.90-0000-00-00-cvs
7026$  cvs -f commit version.in
7027@end smallexample
7028
7029@itemize @bullet
7030@item
7031@file{0000-00-00} is used as a date to pump prime the version.in update
7032mechanism.
7033@item
7034@file{.90} and the previous branch version are used as fairly arbitrary
7035initial branch version number.
7036@end itemize
7037
7038
7039@subheading Update the web and news pages
7040
7041Something?
7042
7043@subheading Tweak cron to track the new branch
7044
7045The file @file{gdbadmin/cron/crontab} contains gdbadmin's cron table.
7046This file needs to be updated so that:
7047
7048@itemize @bullet
7049@item
7050A daily timestamp is added to the file @file{version.in}.
7051@item
7052The new branch is included in the snapshot process.
7053@end itemize
7054
7055@noindent
7056See the file @file{gdbadmin/cron/README} for how to install the updated
7057cron table.
7058
7059The file @file{gdbadmin/ss/README} should also be reviewed to reflect
7060any changes.  That file is copied to both the branch/ and current/
7061snapshot directories.
7062
7063
7064@subheading Update the NEWS and README files
7065
7066The @file{NEWS} file needs to be updated so that on the branch it refers
7067to @emph{changes in the current release} while on the trunk it also
7068refers to @emph{changes since the current release}.
7069
7070The @file{README} file needs to be updated so that it refers to the
7071current release.
7072
7073@subheading Post the branch info
7074
7075Send an announcement to the mailing lists:
7076
7077@itemize @bullet
7078@item
7079@email{gdb-announce@@sourceware.org, GDB Announcement mailing list}
7080@item
7081@email{gdb@@sourceware.org, GDB Discussion mailing list} and
7082@email{gdb-testers@@sourceware.org, GDB Testers mailing list}
7083@end itemize
7084
7085@emph{Pragmatics: The branch creation is sent to the announce list to
7086ensure that people people not subscribed to the higher volume discussion
7087list are alerted.}
7088
7089The announcement should include:
7090
7091@itemize @bullet
7092@item
7093The branch tag.
7094@item
7095How to check out the branch using CVS.
7096@item
7097The date/number of weeks until the release.
7098@item
7099The branch commit policy still holds.
7100@end itemize
7101
7102@section Stabilize the branch
7103
7104Something goes here.
7105
7106@section Create a Release
7107
7108The process of creating and then making available a release is broken
7109down into a number of stages.  The first part addresses the technical
7110process of creating a releasable tar ball.  The later stages address the
7111process of releasing that tar ball.
7112
7113When making a release candidate just the first section is needed.
7114
7115@subsection Create a release candidate
7116
7117The objective at this stage is to create a set of tar balls that can be
7118made available as a formal release (or as a less formal release
7119candidate).
7120
7121@subsubheading Freeze the branch
7122
7123Send out an e-mail notifying everyone that the branch is frozen to
7124@email{gdb-patches@@sourceware.org}.
7125
7126@subsubheading Establish a few defaults.
7127
7128@smallexample
7129$  b=gdb_5_2-branch
7130$  v=5.2
7131$  t=/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp
7132$  echo $t/$b/$v
7133/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
7134$  mkdir -p $t/$b/$v
7135$  cd $t/$b/$v
7136$  pwd
7137/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
7138$  which autoconf
7139/home/gdbadmin/bin/autoconf
7140$
7141@end smallexample
7142
7143@noindent
7144Notes:
7145
7146@itemize @bullet
7147@item
7148Check the @code{autoconf} version carefully.  You want to be using the
7149version documented in the toplevel @file{README-maintainer-mode} file.
7150It is very unlikely that the version of @code{autoconf} installed in
7151system directories (e.g., @file{/usr/bin/autoconf}) is correct.
7152@end itemize
7153
7154@subsubheading Check out the relevant modules:
7155
7156@smallexample
7157$  for m in gdb insight
7158do
7159( mkdir -p $m && cd $m && cvs -q -f -d /cvs/src co -P -r $b $m )
7160done
7161$
7162@end smallexample
7163
7164@noindent
7165Note:
7166
7167@itemize @bullet
7168@item
7169The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled (@file{-f}) so that there isn't
7170any confusion between what is written here and what your local
7171@code{cvs} really does.
7172@end itemize
7173
7174@subsubheading Update relevant files.
7175
7176@table @file
7177
7178@item gdb/NEWS
7179
7180Major releases get their comments added as part of the mainline.  Minor
7181releases should probably mention any significant bugs that were fixed.
7182
7183Don't forget to include the @file{ChangeLog} entry.
7184
7185@smallexample
7186$  emacs gdb/src/gdb/NEWS
7187...
7188c-x 4 a
7189...
7190c-x c-s c-x c-c
7191$  cp gdb/src/gdb/NEWS insight/src/gdb/NEWS
7192$  cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
7193@end smallexample
7194
7195@item gdb/README
7196
7197You'll need to update:
7198
7199@itemize @bullet
7200@item
7201The version.
7202@item
7203The update date.
7204@item
7205Who did it.
7206@end itemize
7207
7208@smallexample
7209$  emacs gdb/src/gdb/README
7210...
7211c-x 4 a
7212...
7213c-x c-s c-x c-c
7214$  cp gdb/src/gdb/README insight/src/gdb/README
7215$  cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
7216@end smallexample
7217
7218@emph{Maintainer note: Hopefully the @file{README} file was reviewed
7219before the initial branch was cut so just a simple substitute is needed
7220to get it updated.}
7221
7222@emph{Maintainer note: Other projects generate @file{README} and
7223@file{INSTALL} from the core documentation.  This might be worth
7224pursuing.}
7225
7226@item gdb/version.in
7227
7228@smallexample
7229$  echo $v > gdb/src/gdb/version.in
7230$  cat gdb/src/gdb/version.in
72315.2
7232$  emacs gdb/src/gdb/version.in
7233...
7234c-x 4 a
7235... Bump to version ...
7236c-x c-s c-x c-c
7237$  cp gdb/src/gdb/version.in insight/src/gdb/version.in
7238$  cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
7239@end smallexample
7240
7241@end table
7242
7243@subsubheading Do the dirty work
7244
7245This is identical to the process used to create the daily snapshot.
7246
7247@smallexample
7248$  for m in gdb insight
7249do
7250( cd $m/src && gmake -f src-release $m.tar )
7251done
7252@end smallexample
7253
7254If the top level source directory does not have @file{src-release}
7255(@value{GDBN} version 5.3.1 or earlier), try these commands instead:
7256
7257@smallexample
7258$  for m in gdb insight
7259do
7260( cd $m/src && gmake -f Makefile.in $m.tar )
7261done
7262@end smallexample
7263
7264@subsubheading Check the source files
7265
7266You're looking for files that have mysteriously disappeared.
7267@kbd{distclean} has the habit of deleting files it shouldn't.  Watch out
7268for the @file{version.in} update @kbd{cronjob}.
7269
7270@smallexample
7271$  ( cd gdb/src && cvs -f -q -n update )
7272M djunpack.bat
7273? gdb-5.1.91.tar
7274? proto-toplev
7275@dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
7276M gdb/ChangeLog
7277M gdb/NEWS
7278M gdb/README
7279M gdb/version.in
7280@dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
7281$
7282@end smallexample
7283
7284@noindent
7285@emph{Don't worry about the @file{gdb.info-??} or
7286@file{gdb/p-exp.tab.c}.  They were generated (and yes @file{gdb.info-1}
7287was also generated only something strange with CVS means that they
7288didn't get suppressed).  Fixing it would be nice though.}
7289
7290@subsubheading Create compressed versions of the release
7291
7292@smallexample
7293$  cp */src/*.tar .
7294$  cp */src/*.bz2 .
7295$  ls -F
7296gdb/ gdb-5.2.tar insight/ insight-5.2.tar
7297$  for m in gdb insight
7298do
7299bzip2 -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.bz2
7300gzip -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.gz
7301done
7302$
7303@end smallexample
7304
7305@noindent
7306Note:
7307
7308@itemize @bullet
7309@item
7310A pipe such as @kbd{bunzip2 < xxx.bz2 | gzip -9 > xxx.gz} is not since,
7311in that mode, @code{gzip} does not know the name of the file and, hence,
7312can not include it in the compressed file.  This is also why the release
7313process runs @code{tar} and @code{bzip2} as separate passes.
7314@end itemize
7315
7316@subsection Sanity check the tar ball
7317
7318Pick a popular machine (Solaris/PPC?) and try the build on that.
7319
7320@smallexample
7321$  bunzip2 < gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 | tar xpf -
7322$  cd gdb-5.2
7323$  ./configure
7324$  make
7325@dots{}
7326$  ./gdb/gdb ./gdb/gdb
7327GNU gdb 5.2
7328@dots{}
7329(gdb)  b main
7330Breakpoint 1 at 0x80732bc: file main.c, line 734.
7331(gdb)  run
7332Starting program: /tmp/gdb-5.2/gdb/gdb
7333
7334Breakpoint 1, main (argc=1, argv=0xbffff8b4) at main.c:734
7335734       catch_errors (captured_main, &args, "", RETURN_MASK_ALL);
7336(gdb)  print args
7337$1 = @{argc = 136426532, argv = 0x821b7f0@}
7338(gdb)
7339@end smallexample
7340
7341@subsection Make a release candidate available
7342
7343If this is a release candidate then the only remaining steps are:
7344
7345@enumerate
7346@item
7347Commit @file{version.in} and @file{ChangeLog}
7348@item
7349Tweak @file{version.in} (and @file{ChangeLog} to read
7350@var{L}.@var{M}.@var{N}-0000-00-00-cvs so that the version update
7351process can restart.
7352@item
7353Make the release candidate available in
7354@uref{ftp://sourceware.org/pub/gdb/snapshots/branch}
7355@item
7356Notify the relevant mailing lists ( @email{gdb@@sourceware.org} and
7357@email{gdb-testers@@sourceware.org} that the candidate is available.
7358@end enumerate
7359
7360@subsection Make a formal release available
7361
7362(And you thought all that was required was to post an e-mail.)
7363
7364@subsubheading Install on sware
7365
7366Copy the new files to both the release and the old release directory:
7367
7368@smallexample
7369$  cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/old-releases/
7370$  cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
7371@end smallexample
7372
7373@noindent
7374Clean up the releases directory so that only the most recent releases
7375are available (e.g.@: keep 5.2 and 5.2.1 but remove 5.1):
7376
7377@smallexample
7378$  cd ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
7379$  rm @dots{}
7380@end smallexample
7381
7382@noindent
7383Update the file @file{README} and @file{.message} in the releases
7384directory:
7385
7386@smallexample
7387$  vi README
7388@dots{}
7389$  rm -f .message
7390$  ln README .message
7391@end smallexample
7392
7393@subsubheading Update the web pages.
7394
7395@table @file
7396
7397@item htdocs/download/ANNOUNCEMENT
7398This file, which is posted as the official announcement, includes:
7399@itemize @bullet
7400@item
7401General announcement.
7402@item
7403News.  If making an @var{M}.@var{N}.1 release, retain the news from
7404earlier @var{M}.@var{N} release.
7405@item
7406Errata.
7407@end itemize
7408
7409@item htdocs/index.html
7410@itemx htdocs/news/index.html
7411@itemx htdocs/download/index.html
7412These files include:
7413@itemize @bullet
7414@item
7415Announcement of the most recent release.
7416@item
7417News entry (remember to update both the top level and the news directory).
7418@end itemize
7419These pages also need to be regenerate using @code{index.sh}.
7420
7421@item download/onlinedocs/
7422You need to find the magic command that is used to generate the online
7423docs from the @file{.tar.bz2}.  The best way is to look in the output
7424from one of the nightly @code{cron} jobs and then just edit accordingly.
7425Something like:
7426
7427@smallexample
7428$  ~/ss/update-web-docs \
7429 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
7430 $PWD/www \
7431 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/onlinedocs \
7432 gdb
7433@end smallexample
7434
7435@item download/ari/
7436Just like the online documentation.  Something like:
7437
7438@smallexample
7439$  /bin/sh ~/ss/update-web-ari \
7440 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
7441 $PWD/www \
7442 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/ari \
7443 gdb
7444@end smallexample
7445
7446@end table
7447
7448@subsubheading Shadow the pages onto gnu
7449
7450Something goes here.
7451
7452
7453@subsubheading Install the @value{GDBN} tar ball on GNU
7454
7455At the time of writing, the GNU machine was @kbd{gnudist.gnu.org} in
7456@file{~ftp/gnu/gdb}.
7457
7458@subsubheading Make the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT}
7459
7460Post the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT} file you created above to:
7461
7462@itemize @bullet
7463@item
7464@email{gdb-announce@@sourceware.org, GDB Announcement mailing list}
7465@item
7466@email{info-gnu@@gnu.org, General GNU Announcement list} (but delay it a
7467day or so to let things get out)
7468@item
7469@email{bug-gdb@@gnu.org, GDB Bug Report mailing list}
7470@end itemize
7471
7472@subsection Cleanup
7473
7474The release is out but you're still not finished.
7475
7476@subsubheading Commit outstanding changes
7477
7478In particular you'll need to commit any changes to:
7479
7480@itemize @bullet
7481@item
7482@file{gdb/ChangeLog}
7483@item
7484@file{gdb/version.in}
7485@item
7486@file{gdb/NEWS}
7487@item
7488@file{gdb/README}
7489@end itemize
7490
7491@subsubheading Tag the release
7492
7493Something like:
7494
7495@smallexample
7496$  d=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
7497$  echo $d
74982002-01-24
7499$  ( cd insight/src/gdb && cvs -f -q update )
7500$  ( cd insight/src && cvs -f -q tag gdb_5_2-$d-release )
7501@end smallexample
7502
7503Insight is used since that contains more of the release than
7504@value{GDBN}.
7505
7506@subsubheading Mention the release on the trunk
7507
7508Just put something in the @file{ChangeLog} so that the trunk also
7509indicates when the release was made.
7510
7511@subsubheading Restart @file{gdb/version.in}
7512
7513If @file{gdb/version.in} does not contain an ISO date such as
7514@kbd{2002-01-24} then the daily @code{cronjob} won't update it.  Having
7515committed all the release changes it can be set to
7516@file{5.2.0_0000-00-00-cvs} which will restart things (yes the @kbd{_}
7517is important - it affects the snapshot process).
7518
7519Don't forget the @file{ChangeLog}.
7520
7521@subsubheading Merge into trunk
7522
7523The files committed to the branch may also need changes merged into the
7524trunk.
7525
7526@subsubheading Revise the release schedule
7527
7528Post a revised release schedule to @email{gdb@@sourceware.org, GDB
7529Discussion List} with an updated announcement.  The schedule can be
7530generated by running:
7531
7532@smallexample
7533$  ~/ss/schedule `date +%s` schedule
7534@end smallexample
7535
7536@noindent
7537The first parameter is approximate date/time in seconds (from the epoch)
7538of the most recent release.
7539
7540Also update the schedule @code{cronjob}.
7541
7542@section Post release
7543
7544Remove any @code{OBSOLETE} code.
7545
7546@node Testsuite
7547
7548@chapter Testsuite
7549@cindex test suite
7550
7551The testsuite is an important component of the @value{GDBN} package.
7552While it is always worthwhile to encourage user testing, in practice
7553this is rarely sufficient; users typically use only a small subset of
7554the available commands, and it has proven all too common for a change
7555to cause a significant regression that went unnoticed for some time.
7556
7557The @value{GDBN} testsuite uses the DejaGNU testing framework.  The
7558tests themselves are calls to various @code{Tcl} procs; the framework
7559runs all the procs and summarizes the passes and fails.
7560
7561@section Using the Testsuite
7562
7563@cindex running the test suite
7564To run the testsuite, simply go to the @value{GDBN} object directory (or to the
7565testsuite's objdir) and type @code{make check}.  This just sets up some
7566environment variables and invokes DejaGNU's @code{runtest} script.  While
7567the testsuite is running, you'll get mentions of which test file is in use,
7568and a mention of any unexpected passes or fails.  When the testsuite is
7569finished, you'll get a summary that looks like this:
7570
7571@smallexample
7572                === gdb Summary ===
7573
7574# of expected passes            6016
7575# of unexpected failures        58
7576# of unexpected successes       5
7577# of expected failures          183
7578# of unresolved testcases       3
7579# of untested testcases         5
7580@end smallexample
7581
7582To run a specific test script, type:
7583@example
7584make check RUNTESTFLAGS='@var{tests}'
7585@end example
7586where @var{tests} is a list of test script file names, separated by
7587spaces.
7588
7589If you use GNU make, you can use its @option{-j} option to run the
7590testsuite in parallel.  This can greatly reduce the amount of time it
7591takes for the testsuite to run.  In this case, if you set
7592@code{RUNTESTFLAGS} then, by default, the tests will be run serially
7593even under @option{-j}.  You can override this and force a parallel run
7594by setting the @code{make} variable @code{FORCE_PARALLEL} to any
7595non-empty value.  Note that the parallel @kbd{make check} assumes
7596that you want to run the entire testsuite, so it is not compatible
7597with some dejagnu options, like @option{--directory}.
7598
7599The ideal test run consists of expected passes only; however, reality
7600conspires to keep us from this ideal.  Unexpected failures indicate
7601real problems, whether in @value{GDBN} or in the testsuite.  Expected
7602failures are still failures, but ones which have been decided are too
7603hard to deal with at the time; for instance, a test case might work
7604everywhere except on AIX, and there is no prospect of the AIX case
7605being fixed in the near future.  Expected failures should not be added
7606lightly, since you may be masking serious bugs in @value{GDBN}.
7607Unexpected successes are expected fails that are passing for some
7608reason, while unresolved and untested cases often indicate some minor
7609catastrophe, such as the compiler being unable to deal with a test
7610program.
7611
7612When making any significant change to @value{GDBN}, you should run the
7613testsuite before and after the change, to confirm that there are no
7614regressions.  Note that truly complete testing would require that you
7615run the testsuite with all supported configurations and a variety of
7616compilers; however this is more than really necessary.  In many cases
7617testing with a single configuration is sufficient.  Other useful
7618options are to test one big-endian (Sparc) and one little-endian (x86)
7619host, a cross config with a builtin simulator (powerpc-eabi,
7620mips-elf), or a 64-bit host (Alpha).
7621
7622If you add new functionality to @value{GDBN}, please consider adding
7623tests for it as well; this way future @value{GDBN} hackers can detect
7624and fix their changes that break the functionality you added.
7625Similarly, if you fix a bug that was not previously reported as a test
7626failure, please add a test case for it.  Some cases are extremely
7627difficult to test, such as code that handles host OS failures or bugs
7628in particular versions of compilers, and it's OK not to try to write
7629tests for all of those.
7630
7631DejaGNU supports separate build, host, and target machines.  However,
7632some @value{GDBN} test scripts do not work if the build machine and
7633the host machine are not the same.  In such an environment, these scripts
7634will give a result of ``UNRESOLVED'', like this:
7635
7636@smallexample
7637UNRESOLVED: gdb.base/example.exp: This test script does not work on a remote host.
7638@end smallexample
7639
7640@section Testsuite Parameters
7641
7642Several variables exist to modify the behavior of the testsuite.
7643
7644@itemize @bullet
7645
7646@item @code{TRANSCRIPT}
7647
7648Sometimes it is convenient to get a transcript of the commands which
7649the testsuite sends to @value{GDBN}.  For example, if @value{GDBN}
7650crashes during testing, a transcript can be used to more easily
7651reconstruct the failure when running @value{GDBN} under @value{GDBN}.
7652
7653You can instruct the @value{GDBN} testsuite to write transcripts by
7654setting the DejaGNU variable @code{TRANSCRIPT} (to any value)
7655before invoking @code{runtest} or @kbd{make check}.  The transcripts
7656will be written into DejaGNU's output directory.  One transcript will
7657be made for each invocation of @value{GDBN}; they will be named
7658@file{transcript.@var{n}}, where @var{n} is an integer.  The first
7659line of the transcript file will show how @value{GDBN} was invoked;
7660each subsequent line is a command sent as input to @value{GDBN}.
7661
7662@smallexample
7663make check RUNTESTFLAGS=TRANSCRIPT=y
7664@end smallexample
7665
7666Note that the transcript is not always complete.  In particular, tests
7667of completion can yield partial command lines.
7668
7669@item @code{GDB}
7670
7671Sometimes one wishes to test a different @value{GDBN} than the one in the build
7672directory.  For example, one may wish to run the testsuite on
7673@file{/usr/bin/gdb}.
7674
7675@smallexample
7676make check RUNTESTFLAGS=GDB=/usr/bin/gdb
7677@end smallexample
7678
7679@item @code{GDBSERVER}
7680
7681When testing a different @value{GDBN}, it is often useful to also test a
7682different gdbserver.
7683
7684@smallexample
7685make check RUNTESTFLAGS="GDB=/usr/bin/gdb GDBSERVER=/usr/bin/gdbserver"
7686@end smallexample
7687
7688@item @code{INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS}
7689
7690When running the testsuite normally one doesn't want whatever is in
7691@file{~/.gdbinit} to interfere with the tests, therefore the test harness
7692passes @option{-nx} to @value{GDBN}.  One also doesn't want any windowed
7693version of @value{GDBN}, e.g., @command{gdbtui}, to run.
7694This is achieved via @code{INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS}.
7695
7696@smallexample
7697set INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS "-nw -nx"
7698@end smallexample
7699
7700This is all well and good, except when testing an installed @value{GDBN}
7701that has been configured with @option{--with-system-gdbinit}.  Here one
7702does not want @file{~/.gdbinit} loaded but one may want the system
7703@file{.gdbinit} file loaded.  This can be achieved by pointing @code{$HOME}
7704at a directory without a @file{.gdbinit} and by overriding
7705@code{INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS} and removing @option{-nx}.
7706
7707@smallexample
7708cd testsuite
7709HOME=`pwd` runtest \
7710  GDB=/usr/bin/gdb \
7711  GDBSERVER=/usr/bin/gdbserver \
7712  INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS=-nw
7713@end smallexample
7714
7715@end itemize
7716
7717There are two ways to run the testsuite and pass additional parameters
7718to DejaGnu.  The first is with @kbd{make check} and specifying the
7719makefile variable @samp{RUNTESTFLAGS}.
7720
7721@smallexample
7722make check RUNTESTFLAGS=TRANSCRIPT=y
7723@end smallexample
7724
7725The second is to cd to the @file{testsuite} directory and invoke the DejaGnu
7726@command{runtest} command directly.
7727
7728@smallexample
7729cd testsuite
7730make site.exp
7731runtest TRANSCRIPT=y
7732@end smallexample
7733
7734@section Testsuite Configuration
7735@cindex Testsuite Configuration
7736
7737It is possible to adjust the behavior of the testsuite by defining
7738the global variables listed below, either in a @file{site.exp} file,
7739or in a board file.
7740
7741@itemize @bullet
7742
7743@item @code{gdb_test_timeout}
7744
7745Defining this variable changes the default timeout duration used during
7746communication with @value{GDBN}.  More specifically, the global variable
7747used during testing is @code{timeout}, but this variable gets reset to
7748@code{gdb_test_timeout} at the beginning of each testcase, making sure
7749that any local change to @code{timeout} in a testcase does not affect
7750subsequent testcases.
7751
7752This global variable comes in handy when the debugger is slower than
7753normal due to the testing environment, triggering unexpected @code{TIMEOUT}
7754test failures.  Examples include when testing on a remote machine, or
7755against a system where communications are slow.
7756
7757If not specifically defined, this variable gets automatically defined
7758to the same value as @code{timeout} during the testsuite initialization.
7759The default value of the timeout is defined in the file
7760@file{gdb/testsuite/config/unix.exp} that is part of the @value{GDBN}
7761test suite@footnote{If you are using a board file, it could override
7762the test-suite default; search the board file for "timeout".}.
7763
7764@end itemize
7765
7766@section Testsuite Organization
7767
7768@cindex test suite organization
7769The testsuite is entirely contained in @file{gdb/testsuite}.  While the
7770testsuite includes some makefiles and configury, these are very minimal,
7771and used for little besides cleaning up, since the tests themselves
7772handle the compilation of the programs that @value{GDBN} will run.  The file
7773@file{testsuite/lib/gdb.exp} contains common utility procs useful for
7774all @value{GDBN} tests, while the directory @file{testsuite/config} contains
7775configuration-specific files, typically used for special-purpose
7776definitions of procs like @code{gdb_load} and @code{gdb_start}.
7777
7778The tests themselves are to be found in @file{testsuite/gdb.*} and
7779subdirectories of those.  The names of the test files must always end
7780with @file{.exp}.  DejaGNU collects the test files by wildcarding
7781in the test directories, so both subdirectories and individual files
7782get chosen and run in alphabetical order.
7783
7784The following table lists the main types of subdirectories and what they
7785are for.  Since DejaGNU finds test files no matter where they are
7786located, and since each test file sets up its own compilation and
7787execution environment, this organization is simply for convenience and
7788intelligibility.
7789
7790@table @file
7791@item gdb.base
7792This is the base testsuite.  The tests in it should apply to all
7793configurations of @value{GDBN} (but generic native-only tests may live here).
7794The test programs should be in the subset of C that is valid K&R,
7795ANSI/ISO, and C@t{++} (@code{#ifdef}s are allowed if necessary, for instance
7796for prototypes).
7797
7798@item gdb.@var{lang}
7799Language-specific tests for any language @var{lang} besides C.  Examples are
7800@file{gdb.cp} and @file{gdb.java}.
7801
7802@item gdb.@var{platform}
7803Non-portable tests.  The tests are specific to a specific configuration
7804(host or target), such as HP-UX or eCos.  Example is @file{gdb.hp}, for
7805HP-UX.
7806
7807@item gdb.@var{compiler}
7808Tests specific to a particular compiler.  As of this writing (June
78091999), there aren't currently any groups of tests in this category that
7810couldn't just as sensibly be made platform-specific, but one could
7811imagine a @file{gdb.gcc}, for tests of @value{GDBN}'s handling of GCC
7812extensions.
7813
7814@item gdb.@var{subsystem}
7815Tests that exercise a specific @value{GDBN} subsystem in more depth.  For
7816instance, @file{gdb.disasm} exercises various disassemblers, while
7817@file{gdb.stabs} tests pathways through the stabs symbol reader.
7818@end table
7819
7820@section Writing Tests
7821@cindex writing tests
7822
7823In many areas, the @value{GDBN} tests are already quite comprehensive; you
7824should be able to copy existing tests to handle new cases.
7825
7826You should try to use @code{gdb_test} whenever possible, since it
7827includes cases to handle all the unexpected errors that might happen.
7828However, it doesn't cost anything to add new test procedures; for
7829instance, @file{gdb.base/exprs.exp} defines a @code{test_expr} that
7830calls @code{gdb_test} multiple times.
7831
7832Only use @code{send_gdb} and @code{gdb_expect} when absolutely
7833necessary.  Even if @value{GDBN} has several valid responses to
7834a command, you can use @code{gdb_test_multiple}.  Like @code{gdb_test},
7835@code{gdb_test_multiple} recognizes internal errors and unexpected
7836prompts.
7837
7838Do not write tests which expect a literal tab character from @value{GDBN}.
7839On some operating systems (e.g.@: OpenBSD) the TTY layer expands tabs to
7840spaces, so by the time @value{GDBN}'s output reaches expect the tab is gone.
7841
7842The source language programs do @emph{not} need to be in a consistent
7843style.  Since @value{GDBN} is used to debug programs written in many different
7844styles, it's worth having a mix of styles in the testsuite; for
7845instance, some @value{GDBN} bugs involving the display of source lines would
7846never manifest themselves if the programs used GNU coding style
7847uniformly.
7848
7849@node Hints
7850
7851@chapter Hints
7852
7853Check the @file{README} file, it often has useful information that does not
7854appear anywhere else in the directory.
7855
7856@menu
7857* Getting Started::		Getting started working on @value{GDBN}
7858* Debugging GDB::		Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
7859@end menu
7860
7861@node Getting Started
7862
7863@section Getting Started
7864
7865@value{GDBN} is a large and complicated program, and if you first starting to
7866work on it, it can be hard to know where to start.  Fortunately, if you
7867know how to go about it, there are ways to figure out what is going on.
7868
7869This manual, the @value{GDBN} Internals manual, has information which applies
7870generally to many parts of @value{GDBN}.
7871
7872Information about particular functions or data structures are located in
7873comments with those functions or data structures.  If you run across a
7874function or a global variable which does not have a comment correctly
7875explaining what is does, this can be thought of as a bug in @value{GDBN}; feel
7876free to submit a bug report, with a suggested comment if you can figure
7877out what the comment should say.  If you find a comment which is
7878actually wrong, be especially sure to report that.
7879
7880Comments explaining the function of macros defined in host, target, or
7881native dependent files can be in several places.  Sometimes they are
7882repeated every place the macro is defined.  Sometimes they are where the
7883macro is used.  Sometimes there is a header file which supplies a
7884default definition of the macro, and the comment is there.  This manual
7885also documents all the available macros.
7886@c (@pxref{Host Conditionals}, @pxref{Target
7887@c Conditionals}, @pxref{Native Conditionals}, and @pxref{Obsolete
7888@c Conditionals})
7889
7890Start with the header files.  Once you have some idea of how
7891@value{GDBN}'s internal symbol tables are stored (see @file{symtab.h},
7892@file{gdbtypes.h}), you will find it much easier to understand the
7893code which uses and creates those symbol tables.
7894
7895You may wish to process the information you are getting somehow, to
7896enhance your understanding of it.  Summarize it, translate it to another
7897language, add some (perhaps trivial or non-useful) feature to @value{GDBN}, use
7898the code to predict what a test case would do and write the test case
7899and verify your prediction, etc.  If you are reading code and your eyes
7900are starting to glaze over, this is a sign you need to use a more active
7901approach.
7902
7903Once you have a part of @value{GDBN} to start with, you can find more
7904specifically the part you are looking for by stepping through each
7905function with the @code{next} command.  Do not use @code{step} or you
7906will quickly get distracted; when the function you are stepping through
7907calls another function try only to get a big-picture understanding
7908(perhaps using the comment at the beginning of the function being
7909called) of what it does.  This way you can identify which of the
7910functions being called by the function you are stepping through is the
7911one which you are interested in.  You may need to examine the data
7912structures generated at each stage, with reference to the comments in
7913the header files explaining what the data structures are supposed to
7914look like.
7915
7916Of course, this same technique can be used if you are just reading the
7917code, rather than actually stepping through it.  The same general
7918principle applies---when the code you are looking at calls something
7919else, just try to understand generally what the code being called does,
7920rather than worrying about all its details.
7921
7922@cindex command implementation
7923A good place to start when tracking down some particular area is with
7924a command which invokes that feature.  Suppose you want to know how
7925single-stepping works.  As a @value{GDBN} user, you know that the
7926@code{step} command invokes single-stepping.  The command is invoked
7927via command tables (see @file{command.h}); by convention the function
7928which actually performs the command is formed by taking the name of
7929the command and adding @samp{_command}, or in the case of an
7930@code{info} subcommand, @samp{_info}.  For example, the @code{step}
7931command invokes the @code{step_command} function and the @code{info
7932display} command invokes @code{display_info}.  When this convention is
7933not followed, you might have to use @code{grep} or @kbd{M-x
7934tags-search} in emacs, or run @value{GDBN} on itself and set a
7935breakpoint in @code{execute_command}.
7936
7937@cindex @code{bug-gdb} mailing list
7938If all of the above fail, it may be appropriate to ask for information
7939on @code{bug-gdb}.  But @emph{never} post a generic question like ``I was
7940wondering if anyone could give me some tips about understanding
7941@value{GDBN}''---if we had some magic secret we would put it in this manual.
7942Suggestions for improving the manual are always welcome, of course.
7943
7944@node Debugging GDB
7945
7946@section Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
7947@cindex debugging @value{GDBN}
7948
7949If @value{GDBN} is limping on your machine, this is the preferred way to get it
7950fully functional.  Be warned that in some ancient Unix systems, like
7951Ultrix 4.2, a program can't be running in one process while it is being
7952debugged in another.  Rather than typing the command @kbd{@w{./gdb
7953./gdb}}, which works on Suns and such, you can copy @file{gdb} to
7954@file{gdb2} and then type @kbd{@w{./gdb ./gdb2}}.
7955
7956When you run @value{GDBN} in the @value{GDBN} source directory, it will read a
7957@file{.gdbinit} file that sets up some simple things to make debugging
7958gdb easier.  The @code{info} command, when executed without a subcommand
7959in a @value{GDBN} being debugged by gdb, will pop you back up to the top level
7960gdb.  See @file{.gdbinit} for details.
7961
7962If you use emacs, you will probably want to do a @code{make TAGS} after
7963you configure your distribution; this will put the machine dependent
7964routines for your local machine where they will be accessed first by
7965@kbd{M-.}
7966
7967Also, make sure that you've either compiled @value{GDBN} with your local cc, or
7968have run @code{fixincludes} if you are compiling with gcc.
7969
7970@section Submitting Patches
7971
7972@cindex submitting patches
7973Thanks for thinking of offering your changes back to the community of
7974@value{GDBN} users.  In general we like to get well designed enhancements.
7975Thanks also for checking in advance about the best way to transfer the
7976changes.
7977
7978The @value{GDBN} maintainers will only install ``cleanly designed'' patches.
7979This manual summarizes what we believe to be clean design for @value{GDBN}.
7980
7981If the maintainers don't have time to put the patch in when it arrives,
7982or if there is any question about a patch, it goes into a large queue
7983with everyone else's patches and bug reports.
7984
7985@cindex legal papers for code contributions
7986The legal issue is that to incorporate substantial changes requires a
7987copyright assignment from you and/or your employer, granting ownership
7988of the changes to the Free Software Foundation.  You can get the
7989standard documents for doing this by sending mail to @code{gnu@@gnu.org}
7990and asking for it.  We recommend that people write in "All programs
7991owned by the Free Software Foundation" as "NAME OF PROGRAM", so that
7992changes in many programs (not just @value{GDBN}, but GAS, Emacs, GCC,
7993etc) can be
7994contributed with only one piece of legalese pushed through the
7995bureaucracy and filed with the FSF.  We can't start merging changes until
7996this paperwork is received by the FSF (their rules, which we follow
7997since we maintain it for them).
7998
7999Technically, the easiest way to receive changes is to receive each
8000feature as a small context diff or unidiff, suitable for @code{patch}.
8001Each message sent to me should include the changes to C code and
8002header files for a single feature, plus @file{ChangeLog} entries for
8003each directory where files were modified, and diffs for any changes
8004needed to the manuals (@file{gdb/doc/gdb.texinfo} or
8005@file{gdb/doc/gdbint.texinfo}).  If there are a lot of changes for a
8006single feature, they can be split down into multiple messages.
8007
8008In this way, if we read and like the feature, we can add it to the
8009sources with a single patch command, do some testing, and check it in.
8010If you leave out the @file{ChangeLog}, we have to write one.  If you leave
8011out the doc, we have to puzzle out what needs documenting.  Etc., etc.
8012
8013The reason to send each change in a separate message is that we will not
8014install some of the changes.  They'll be returned to you with questions
8015or comments.  If we're doing our job correctly, the message back to you
8016will say what you have to fix in order to make the change acceptable.
8017The reason to have separate messages for separate features is so that
8018the acceptable changes can be installed while one or more changes are
8019being reworked.  If multiple features are sent in a single message, we
8020tend to not put in the effort to sort out the acceptable changes from
8021the unacceptable, so none of the features get installed until all are
8022acceptable.
8023
8024If this sounds painful or authoritarian, well, it is.  But we get a lot
8025of bug reports and a lot of patches, and many of them don't get
8026installed because we don't have the time to finish the job that the bug
8027reporter or the contributor could have done.  Patches that arrive
8028complete, working, and well designed, tend to get installed on the day
8029they arrive.  The others go into a queue and get installed as time
8030permits, which, since the maintainers have many demands to meet, may not
8031be for quite some time.
8032
8033Please send patches directly to
8034@email{gdb-patches@@sourceware.org, the @value{GDBN} maintainers}.
8035
8036@section Build Script
8037
8038@cindex build script
8039
8040The script @file{gdb_buildall.sh} builds @value{GDBN} with flag
8041@option{--enable-targets=all} set.  This builds @value{GDBN} with all supported
8042targets activated.  This helps testing @value{GDBN} when doing changes that
8043affect more than one architecture and is much faster than using
8044@file{gdb_mbuild.sh}.
8045
8046After building @value{GDBN} the script checks which architectures are
8047supported and then switches the current architecture to each of those to get
8048information about the architecture.  The test results are stored in log files
8049in the directory the script was called from.
8050
8051@include observer.texi
8052
8053@node GNU Free Documentation License
8054@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8055@include fdl.texi
8056
8057@node Index
8058@unnumbered Index
8059
8060@printindex cp
8061
8062@bye
8063